Lexus GS450H 2007 Owner's Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 Before driving

Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.

2 When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

3 Interior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.

4

Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

5

When trouble arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.

6

Vehicle  specifications

Detailed vehicle information.

7 For US owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners.

Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

1 Before driving

1-1. Hybrid system.................................. 2

Hybrid system...................................... 2

1-2. Key information ............................. 11

Keys ......................................................... 11

1-3. Opening, closing and locking  the doors and trunk ................... 13

Smart access system with  push-button start ........................... 13

Wireless remote control.............. 22

Doors.................................................... 25

Trunk..................................................... 29

1-4. Adjustable components ............ 33

Front seats.......................................... 33

Driving position memory  system ............................................... 35

Head restraints................................ 38

Seat belts ............................................ 40

Steering wheel.................................. 46

Inside rear view mirror.................. 47

Outside rear view mirrors........... 48

1-5. Opening and closing the  windows and moon roof.......... 50

Power windows............................... 50

Moon roof .......................................... 52

1-6. Refueling........................................ 55

Opening the fuel tank cap........... 55

1-7. Theft deterrent system............... 59

1-8. Safety information....................... 64

2

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer  system ............................................... 59

Alarm..................................................... 61

Theft prevention labels 

(U.S.A.)............................................. 63

Correct driving posture ............... 64

SRS airbags ....................................... 66

Front passenger occupant  classification system.................... 77

Child restraint systems ................. 82

Installing child restraints.............. 85

When driving

2-1. Driving procedures..................... 96

Driving the vehicle.......................... 96

Starting the hybrid system......... 103

Transmission ................................... 106

Turn signal lever.............................. 110

Parking brake .................................... 111

2-2. Instrument cluster ...................... 112

Gauges and meters ....................... 112

Indicators and warning lights ..... 116

Multi-information display............. 119

ii

2-3. Operating the lights and  windshield wipers.................... 122

Headlight switch............................ 122

Fog light switch .............................. 125

Windshield wipers and  washer............................................. 126

Headlight cleaner switch ........... 128

2-4. Using other driving  systems ....................................... 129

Cruise control ................................ 129

Dynamic radar cruise  control............................................. 132

Intuitive parking assist ................... 141

Rear view monitor system ......... 160

AVS (Adaptive Variable 

Suspension System).................. 163

Driving assist systems.................. 164

PCS (Pre-Collision 

System)........................................... 169

2-5. Driving information................... 172

Cargo and luggage....................... 172

Vehicle load limits......................... 175

Winter driving tips ........................ 176

Trailer towing................................... 181

Dinghy towing ................................ 182

3 Interior features

3-1. Using the touch screen ........... 184

Touch screen .................................. 184

Setting the touch screen ............ 187

1

3-2. Using the air conditioning  system and defogger............. 192

Automatic air conditioning  system ............................................. 192

Rear window and outside rear  view mirror defoggers.................. 199

2

3

3-3. Using the audio system........... 200

Audio system type ...................... 200

Using the radio.............................. 203

Using the cassette player .......... 212

Using the CD player.................... 216

Playing MP3 and WMA  discs ................................................ 224

Using the DVD player ............... 232

Playing DVD video/audio........ 235

Playing video CD......................... 247

DVD player and DVD video  disc information .......................... 251

Optimal use of the audio/  video system................................ 255

Using the steering switches..... 259

4

5

6

7 iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

3-4. Using the hands-free  system......................................... 261

Hands-free system ....................... 261

Using the Bluetooth

®  phone ............................................. 265

Setting the hands-free  system ............................................ 278

3-5. Using the interior lights ......... 303

Interior lights list........................... 303

3-6. Using the storage  features..................................... 306

List of storage features.............. 306

3-7. Other interior features............ 312

Sun visors.......................................... 312

Vanity mirror................................... 313

Clock.................................................. 314

Outside temperature  display ............................................. 315

Ashtrays ............................................ 316

Cigarette lighter............................ 317

Power outlet.................................... 318

Seat heaters..................................... 319

Seat heaters and  ventilators...................................... 321

Armrest ............................................ 323

Rear sunshade............................... 324

Floor mats........................................ 326

Trunk features................................ 327

Garage door opener.................. 329

Compass........................................... 334

Lexus Link System ...................... 338

4 Maintenance and care

4-1. Maintenance and care............ 352

Cleaning and protecting the  vehicle exterior .......................... 352

Cleaning and protecting the  vehicle interior............................ 354

4-2. Maintenance.............................. 357

Maintenance requirements ..... 357

General maintenance............... 359

Emission inspection and  maintenance (I/M)  programs ...................................... 362

4-3. Do-it-yourself  maintenance............................ 363

Do-it-yourself service  precautions.................................. 363

Hood.................................................. 366

Positioning the jack ..................... 367

Engine compartment.................. 369

Tires .................................................. 383

Tire inflation pressure................. 393

Wheels.............................................. 397

Air conditioning filter.................. 399

Electronic key battery................. 401

Checking and replacing  fuses............................................... 403

Headlight aim.................................. 419

Light bulbs........................................ 421

iv

5 When trouble arises 6 Vehicle specifications

5-1. Essential information .............. 428

If your vehicle needs to be  towed.............................................. 428

If you think something is  wrong............................................. 435

Event data recorder.................... 436

5-2. Steps to take in an  emergency .............................. 438

If a warning light turns on or a  warning buzzer sounds............... 438

If a warning message is  displayed....................................... 444

If you have a flat tire (Vehicles  with run-flat tires) ...................... 460

If you have a flat tire (Vehicles  with standard tires).................... 461

If the hybrid system will not  start .................................................. 471

If the shift lever cannot be  shifted from P.............................. 472

If you lose your keys.................... 473

When the electronic key  battery is discharged ............... 474

If the 12 volt battery is  discharged ................................... 476

If your vehicle overheats .......... 480

If the vehicle becomes  stuck............................................... 483

6-1. Specifications............................ 486

Maintenance data........................ 486

Fuel information............................ 495

Tire information ........................... 498

1

2

6-2. Customization ........................... 510

Customizable features ............... 510

6-3. Initialization ................................ 514

Items to initialize ............................ 514

3

7 For US owners

Reporting safety defects for 

U.S. owners................................... 516

5

Index

Alphabetical index.................... 518

What to do if............................... 526

4

6

7 v

Pictorial index

Exterior

Headlight (low beam)

P. 122

Parking light

P. 122

Windshield wipers

P. 126

Moon roof 

P. 52

Outside rear view mirror

P. 48

Hood

P. 366

vi

Side marker light

P. 122

Fog light

P. 125

Turn signal light

P. 110

Headlight (high beam)

P. 122

Fuel filler door

P. 55

Door

P. 25

Rear window defogger

P. 199

Tail lights

P. 122

Trunk

P. 29

Tire

● Rotation

● Replacement

● Inflation pressure

● Information

P. 383

P. 461

P. 493

P. 498

vii

Turn signal light

P. 110

Side marker light

P. 122



: If equipped

Pictorial index

Interior

Seat belt

P. 40

Head restraint

P. 38

Power window  switch

P. 50

A

Door pocket

P. 311

Floor mat

P. 326

Driver airbag

P. 66

Knee airbags

P. 66

Front passenger airbag

P. 66

Armrest

P. 323

Cup holders

P. 310

Ashtray

P. 316

Power outlet

P. 318

viii

Front seat

P. 33

SRS side airbag

P. 66

Console box

P. 307

A

Inside rear view mirror

P. 47

Lexus Link System switches 

P. 338

Personal light

P. 303

Moon roof switch 

P. 52

Personal light

P. 303

Interior light

P. 303

SRS curtain shield airbag

P. 66

Interior light

P. 303

Vanity mirror

P. 313

Sun visor

P. 312

Garage door opener switches 

P. 329

Compass 

P. 334

ix



: If equipped

Pictorial index

Interior

B

Driving position memory switches 

P. 35

Door lock switch

P. 25

Window lock switch

P. 50

Power window switches

P. 50

x

C

Shift lever

P. 106

Cigarette lighter

P. 317

Ashtray

P. 316

Cup holders

P. 310

Shift lock override button

P. 472

xi



: If equipped

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

Windshield wipers and washer switch

P. 126

Multi-information display

P. 119

Gauges and meters

P. 112

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch

P. 122

P. 110

P. 125

Seat heater switches

Power switch

P. 103



P. 319

Seat heater/ventilator switches

P. 321

 

Parking brake pedal

P. 111

Tilt and telescopic steering  control switch

P. 46

Coin holder

P. 309

“AVS” switch

P. 163

Mode select switch

P. 107

“TRAC OFF” switch

P. 166

Trunk opener main switch

P. 29

Glove box

P. 307

xii

A

Audio remote control switches

P. 259

B

Telephone switch

P. 261

“DISP” switch

P. 120

Distance switch 

P. 134

Cruise control switch

P. 129, 132

Talk switch

*

P. 272

xiii



: If equipped

*

: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

C

Clock

P. 314

Outside temperature display

P. 315

Touch screen 

P. 184

Air conditioning  system

P. 192

Audio system

P. 200

Emergency flashers

Navigation system

*

Security indicator

P. 59, 61

Rear window and outside  rear view mirror defoggers 

P. 199

xiv

D

Headlight cleaner switch

P. 128

Rear sunshade switch

P. 324

Intuitive parking assist switch 

P. 141

“AFS OFF” switch

P. 123

Odometer/trip meter and trip meter  reset button

P. 113

Instrument panel light control

P. 113

Outside rear view mirror switches

P. 48

Trunk opener

P. 29

Fuel filler door opener

P. 55

xv



: If equipped

*

: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your

Lexus vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the hybrid system, multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, vehicle dynamics integrated management, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.

High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding.

Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.

xvi

Scrapping of your Lexus

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

xvii

CAUTION

■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

■ When children are in the vehicle

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When left unattended, children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

■ Dispose of the hybrid battery (traction battery)

If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event of that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of your Lexus dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, they may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury. xviii

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.

Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will also see the symbol of a circle with a slash through it. This means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or

“Do not let this happen”.

xix

xx

Before driving

1

1-1. Hybrid system ............................... 2

Hybrid system................................... 2

1-5. Opening and closing the  windows and moon roof ....... 50

Power windows............................. 50

Moon roof....................................... 52

1-2. Key information........................... 11

Keys....................................................... 11

1-3. Opening, closing and locking  the doors and trunk................. 13

Smart access system with  push-button start........................ 13

Wireless remote control............ 22

Doors................................................. 25

Trunk .................................................. 29

1-6. Refueling..................................... 55

Opening the fuel tank cap ....... 55

1-7. Theft deterrent system............ 59

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer  system............................................ 59

Alarm .................................................. 61

Theft prevention labels 

(U.S.A.).......................................... 63

1-4. Adjustable components......... 33

Front seats....................................... 33

Driving position memory  system ............................................ 35

Head restraints.............................. 38

Seat belts ......................................... 40

Steering wheel............................... 46

Inside rear view mirror............... 47

Outside rear view mirrors ........ 48

1-8. Safety information.................... 64

Correct driving posture ............ 64

SRS airbags .................................... 66

Front passenger occupant  classification system.................. 77

Child restraint systems .............. 82

Installing child restraints............ 85

1

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid system

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate with care.

The hybrid system combines a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.

2

Gasoline engine

Electric motor (Traction motor)

1-1. Hybrid system

■ When stopped/during take-off

The gasoline engine stops when the vehicle is stopped. During takeoff, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped and the motor is used.

■ During normal driving

The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor

(traction motor) charges the hybrid battery as necessary.

■ When accelerating sharply

The power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added via electric motor (traction motor) to that of the gasoline engine.

■ When braking (Regenerative brake)

The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery

(traction battery).

1

■ Regenerative braking

The motor generator converts kinetic energy to electric energy when:

● The accelerator pedal is released.

● The brake pedal is depressed with the shift lever in “D” or “S”.

■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop

The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions:

● During gasoline engine warm-up

● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging

● During low or high hybrid battery (traction battery) temperature

3

1-1. Hybrid system

4

■ Charging the battery

● As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery becomes fully discharged and you are unable to jump-start the vehicle with the 12 volt battery, contact your

Lexus dealer.

● If the shift lever is in “N”, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged. When driving in heavy traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in

“D” or “S” to avoid discharging the battery.

■ After the 12 volt battery has discharged or has been changed or removed

The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid battery

(traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move. Always put the shift lever in “P” when parked.

The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating, and are not a malfunction.

● Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.

● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear seat when the hybrid system starts or stops.

● Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the trunk lid is open.

● Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the hybrid system starts or stops.

● Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.

● Sounds may be heard from the regenerative brake when you press the brake pedal.

● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.

● You may hear cooling fan sounds coming from the air intake vents behind the rear seat.

■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal

Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal.

Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

High voltage components

1-1. Hybrid system

1

Inverter unit

Air conditioning compressor

Hybrid battery (Traction battery)

DC/DC converter

Service plug


High voltage cables (orange color)

Caution label

Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high voltage system (about 650V at maximum) as well as parts that become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle.

5

1-1. Hybrid system

■ Hybrid battery air vent

Hybrid battery air vent

There is an air intake vent on the package tray for the purpose of cooling the hybrid battery (traction battery). If the vent becomes blocked, the hybrid battery may overheat, leading to a reduction in hybrid battery output.

Emergency shut off system

The emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage when a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer.

Energy monitor/consumption screen

You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-information display (

 P. 119) and the touch screen (



P. 184). The following images

are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

■ Energy monitor

● How to display on the touch screen:

STEP 1 Press .

STEP 2 Touch on the “Information” screen.

If the “Consumption” screen is displayed, touch

● How to display on the multi-information display:

STEP 1 Push the tor display.

.

button several times to select the energy moni-

6

1-1. Hybrid system

When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor)

When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction motor)

When the vehicle is powered by the  gasoline engine

Touch screen


1

When the vehicle is charging the hybrid  battery (traction  battery)

When there is no energy flow

Hybrid battery 

(traction battery) status

Low Full Low Full

7

1-1. Hybrid system

■ Consumption

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, touch .

Fuel consumption in the past 30 minutes

Regenerated energy in the past

30 minutes

One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 4 symbols are shown.

Best past fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Cruising range

■ Resetting the consumption data

Touching will reset the “Average fuel consumption”. Touching will reset all the data (except the “Cruising Range”) on the “Consumption” screen.

Hybrid warning message

A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.

If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display and the touch screen, read the message and follow the instructions.

( 

P. 444)

8

1-1. Hybrid system

■ If a warning light comes on or a warning message is displayed, or the 12 volt battery is disconnected

The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If the

“READY” light does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.

1

CAUTION

■ High voltage precautions

The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12 volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury.

● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables and their connectors.

● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage.

Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle.

● Never try to open the service plug access hole located in the luggage compartment. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage.

■ Nickel-metal hydride battery

Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. If disposed of improperly, it is hazardous to the environment and there is a risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in death or serious injury.

■ Emergency shut off system

● Carefully check to see if there are exposed high voltage parts or cables. Never touch the parts or cables. (

 P. 5)

● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible.

9

1-1. Hybrid system

CAUTION

■ Road accident cautions

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury.

● Pull your vehicle off the road, put the shift lever in “P”, apply the parking brake, turn the hybrid system off.

● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.

● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.

● If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch it as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.

● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous.

● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with the rear wheels raised. If the wheels with the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause an electricity leakage leading to a fire.( 

P. 428)

NOTICE

■ Hybrid battery air vent

● Do not put foreign objects over the air vent. The hybrid battery (traction battery) may overheat and be damaged.

● Clean the air vent regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from overheating.

● Do not wet the air vent. It may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).

● Do not load a large amount of water such as an aquarium into the vehicle. If water spills over the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged.

10

1-2. Key information

Keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart access system with push-button start

(

 P. 13)

• Operating the wireless remote control function 

(

 P. 22)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

1

Using the mechanical key

Take out the mechanical key.

You can use the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors, and to unlock the trunk.

■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant

Turn the trunk opener main switch OFF and lock the glove box as circumstances demand. ( 

P. 30, 307)



Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.

■ Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key number plate. (

 P. 473)

11

1-2. Key information

NOTICE

■ To prevent key damage

● Do not disassemble the electronic key.

● Do not bend the keys, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.

● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

12

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart access system with push-button start

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key, for example in your pocket.

1

Locks and unlocks the doors (

 P. 14)

Unlocks the trunk (

 P. 14)

Starts and stops the hybrid system ( 

P. 103)

13

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Locking and unlocking the doors

Press the lock button to lock the door.

Unlocking the trunk

Grip the handle to unlock the door.

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked.

Press the button to unlock the trunk.

14

Antenna location


Antennas outside cabin

Antennas inside cabin

Antenna outside trunk

Antenna inside trunk

1

■ Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations.

● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication device

● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity

● When the electronic key has come into contact with, or is covered by a metallic object

● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby

● When the electronic key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a personal computer

In these situations, remove all possible cause of malfunction, or follow the steps outlined in “When the electronic key battery is discharged”. ( 

P. 474)

15


■ Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.

STEP 1 Turn the power switch “OFF”.

STEP 2 When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and hold , , or button on the key. for approximately 5 seconds while pushing the

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (Wait for at least 5 seconds after each operation to continue an operation.)


Unlocking doors Beep

Hold the driver’s door handle to unlock only the driver’s door

Hold a passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors

Hold the door handle to unlock the front and rear doors on your side

Exterior: Beeps 3 times

Interior: Rings once

Exterior: Beeps 4 times


Hold the door handle to unlock the door

Exterior: Beeps once


Hold a door handle to unlock all doors

Exterior: Beeps twice


STEP 3 Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of the doors.

If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (

 P. 61)

16


■ Battery-saving function

In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.

● When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more

● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle for 10 minutes or more

The system will resume operation when...

● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch

● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function 

( 

P. 22) or the mechanical key (



P. 474)

■ Electronic key battery depletion

● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used.) If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( 

P. 401)

● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances.

• TVs

• Personal computers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

• Table lamps

■ To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)

1

17


■ Note for the smart access system with push-button start

● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.

● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the theft deterrent system automatically locks the vehicle again.

18


■ Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. ( 

P. 449)

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.

1

Alarm

Exterior alarm sounds once for 2 seconds

Exterior alarm sounds once for 10 seconds

Interior alarm sounds continuously

Situation

Tried to lock the doors using the entry function while the electronic key is still inside the passenger compartment

Tried to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the power switch “OFF”

Closed the trunk while the electronic key is still inside and all doors are locked

Tried to lock the vehicle using the entry function while a door is open

Tried to open the door and exit the vehicle without shifting the shift lever to “P”

Correction procedure

Retrieve the electronic key from the passenger compartment and lock the doors again.

Turn the power switch

“OFF” and lock the doors again.

Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.

Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

Shift the shift lever to

“P”.

19


Alarm

Interior alarm rings continuously

Situation

Switched to “ACC” mode while the driver's door is open (Opened the driver's door when the power switch is in “ACC” mode.)

Turned the power switch

“OFF” while the driver's door is open



“OFF” and close the driver's door.

Close the driver's door.

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key. 

( 

P. 474)

● Starting the hybrid system:

 P. 475

● Replacing the battery: 

P. 401

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start, theft deterrent system) can be changed. ( 

P. 510)

■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1

NOTE: 

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING: 

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

20


For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE: 

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.



Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1

CAUTION

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system with push-button start antennas.



The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.

● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.



Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

21


Wireless remote control

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and the trunk from outside the vehicle.

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Opens the windows and moon roof (push and hold)

Unlocks the trunk 

(push and hold)

Sounds alarm 

(push and hold) (

 P. 62)

■ 2-step unlocking function

When you push the button, the driver's door is unlocked. Pushing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

■ Operation indicator

● Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

● Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.

● Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds when the windows and moon roof begin to open.

■ Door lock buzzer

If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

■ Security feature

 P. 18

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

 P. 20

22



 P. 15

■ Low battery

If the wireless remote control does not function or if it only operates very close to the vehicle, the battery may be low. ( 

P. 401)

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. 2-step unlocking function, trunk unlocking function) can be changed.

( 

P. 510)

■ Certification for wireless remote control (for vehicles sold in the U.S.A.)

NOTE: 


NOTICE: 

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING: 


1

23


■ Certification for wireless remote control (for vehicles sold in Canada)

NOTE: 


24


Doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control or door lock switch.

■ Smart access system with push-button start



P. 14

■ Wireless remote control



P. 22

■ Door lock switch

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

1

■ Inside lock button

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

25


Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the locks are set.

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down rear door switches to lock the rear doors.

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or canceled:

Function

Shift position linked door locking function

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Speed linked door locking function

Driver's door linked door unlocking function

Operation

Shifting the shift lever out of “P” locks all doors.

Shifting the shift lever to “P” unlocks all doors.

All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is opened within 10 seconds after turning the power switch “OFF”.

26


■ Setting and canceling the functions

To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:

STEP 1

STEP 2

Close all the doors and switch the power switch to “IG-ON” mode. (Perform step 2 within 10 seconds.)

Shift the shift lever to “P” or “N”, press and hold the driver's door lock switch ( or ) for 5 seconds then release.

The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set or canceled are shown as follows.

1

Function

Shift position linked door locking function

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Speed linked door locking function

Driver's door linked door unlocking function

Shift lever position Switch position

“P”

“N”

When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked.

27


■ Closing the front doors from outside with the inside lock button set in the locked position

The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode, or the electronic key is left in the vehicle. (However, depending on the key's location, the system may not be able to detect it. In these instances the door lock protection function will not operate properly.)

■ Locking the front doors from outside using the inside lock button

Push the inside lock button to the lock position and close the door.

■ Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (

 P. 474)

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (

 P. 510)

CAUTION

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.



Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Always use a seat belt.

● Always lock all doors.

● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.

● Do not pull the inside handle of the front door while driving.

● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.

28


Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control.

■ Wireless remote control



P. 22

■ Trunk opener

Open the trunk lid.

1

■ Smart access system with push-button start



P. 14

29


Luggage security system

The trunk opener feature using the trunk opener switch, wireless remote control and smart access system with push-button start can be disabled by turning off a switch inside the glove box. This function allows you to keep valuables safety locked in the trunk when leaving a key with a parking attendant.

Enabled

Disabled

After turning off the trunk opener main switch, lock the glove box using the mechanical key. Take the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only. (

 P. 11)

30


■ Trunk lid closer

In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open (not latched properly), the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.

■ Trunk light

When the trunk light switch is set to ON, the trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.

ON

OFF

1

■ Trunk handle

Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.

■ Internal trunk release lever

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of trunk lid.

The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.

■ Using the mechanical key

The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (

 P. 474)

31


CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Keep the trunk lid closed.



This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

■ When children are in the vehicle

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they may lock themselves in the vehicle or trunk, which could cause the child to overheat or suffocate resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the trunk has not been fully closed

Be careful that your fingers do not get caught by the trunk lid when it is closing automatically.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damage to the trunk lid closer

Do not apply excessive force when the closer is operating.

32

1-4. Adjustable components

Front seats

Seat position fore/aft control switch

For driver’s seat only: Height of the head restraint also moves upward or downward with the seat movement.

Seatback angle control switch

Seat cushion (front) angle control switch

Vertical height control switch

Lumbar support control switch

33

1

1-4. Adjustable components

CAUTION

■ Reclining adjustment

Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion, to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.



If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.

■ When adjusting the front passenger’s seat from the driver’s seat

Wait until a passenger is seated or have gotten off the front passenger’s seat before operating the switch to avoid injuring the passenger.

34


Driving position memory system (if equipped)

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be entered into the computer's memory and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.



Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.

The same buttons are found on the front passenger's side, allowing the position of the front passenger's seat to be memorized.

■ Entering a position to memory

Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Switch to “IG-ON” mode.

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions.

While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps.

If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.

1

35


■ Recalling the memorized position

Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.

STEP 1

Switch to “IG-ON” mode.

STEP 2

Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to recall the desired position.

36

Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation (driver side only)

Memorized driving positions can be recalled when you unlock the driver’s door using the entry function or wireless remote control and open the driver’s door. Steering wheel position is recalled when the power switch is set to the “IG-ON” mode.

■ Setting the linked door unlock operation

STEP 1 Set the driving positions into the memory system using the “1”, “2” or “3” buttons on the driver’s side. (

 P. 35)

STEP 2

Turn the power switch to the “OFF” mode, then close the driver’s door.

STEP 3

Push the “1”, “2” or “3” button on the driver’s side and the button on the wireless remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you hear a beep.


STEP 4

Open one of the doors.

If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. ( 

P. 61)

1

■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation

STEP 1 Close the driver’s door with the power switch set to the “OFF” mode.

STEP 2 Push the “SET” button and the button on the wireless remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you hear 2 beeps.

■ Retained accessory power

Each memorized position (except for the tilt and telescopic steering column) can be activated within 30 seconds after the corresponding side door is opened, even if the power switch is in the “OFF” mode.

■ If any position memory button is pushed while the adjustments are being made

The operation will stop. To reactivate the system, push the desired button (“1” or “2”) again.

■ If the 12 volt battery is disconnected

The memorized positions must be reset because the computer's memory is erased when the battery is disconnected.

CAUTION

■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another driving position memory button.

37


Head restraints

■ Vertical adjustment

Driver’s seat

Head restraint height can be adjusted automatically along with the seat position adjustment. (

 P. 33)

Front passenger’s and rear seats

Lock release button

Grip head restraint and move it up or down.

Push and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

Grip head restraint and remove while holding the lock release button.

■ Horizontal adjustment

Front and outboard rear seats

Grip head restraint and twist to tilt forward or backward.

38


■ Adjusting the height of the driver’s head restraint manually

Push and hold the lock release button when lowering or raising the head restraint.

1

■ Removing the driver’s seat head restraint

For removal and installation, ask your Lexus dealer.

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

■ Adjusting the center rear seat head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.

■ Head restraints of different seats

The head restraints are specially designed for the seats on which they are installed.

CAUTION

■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

39


Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

■ Correct use of the seat belts

Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

Do not twist the seat belt.

■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt

Fastening the belt

Release button

Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard.

Releasing the belt

Press the release button.

40


■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)

Up

Down

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

1

Seat belt comfort guide (outboard rear seats)

If the shoulder belt fits close to a person’s neck, slide the seat belt comfort guide forward.

Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision.

The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact.

41


Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)

When the pre-collision sensor detects an obstacle and determines that a collision is unavoidable, the seat belts lessen collision injury by retracting the slack in the front seat belts before the collision, thus restraining the driver and passenger at an earlier stage.



The seat belts will also operate in the event of sudden braking. ( 

P. 169)

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. ( 

P. 89)

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (

 P. 40)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest.

Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

42


■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (

 P. 40)

■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

● Use a child restraint system appropriately for the child, until the child become large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. ( 

P. 82)

● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,

follow the instructions on P. 40 regarding seat belt usage.

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

The seat belts cannot be used if a pretensioner has activated. After an accident, have your Lexus dealer inspect the pretensioners and replace them, if necessary.

■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.

1

43


CAUTION

■ Wearing a seat belt

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

● Always wear a seat belt properly.

● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at the same time, including children.

● Children should be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Seat belt damage and wear

● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate or buckle to be jammed in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.

Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from injury.

● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of a seat belt.

Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may cause it to activate or operate improperly and may cause death or serious injury.

44


CAUTION

■ Using a seat belt extender

● Do not wear the seat belt extender, if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system, because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or injury in the event of a collision.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

■ Precaution for pre-collision seat belts

Do not rely solely on the pre-collision system to avoid accidents. Always pay attention to the surrounding conditions, and drive safely and responsibly.

1

NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.



This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

45


Steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the power switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.

Up

Down

Toward the driver

Away from the driver

Auto tilt away and auto return

When the power switch is turned

“OFF”, the steering wheel returns to its stowed position by moving up and away to enable easier driver entry and exit.

Switching to “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode will return the steering wheel to the original position.

CAUTION


Do not adjust the steering wheel.



Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

46


Inside rear view mirror

In the “AUTO” mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.

Turns “AUTO” mode on/off

The indicator comes on when

“AUTO” mode is turned ON.

The mirror is automatically set to “AUTO” whenever the power switch is turned ON.

1

■ To prevent sensor error

To ensure correct functioning of the sensors, do not touch or cover the sensors.

CAUTION


Do not adjust the position of the mirror.



Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, or resulting in death or serious injury.

47


Outside rear view mirrors

Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the power switch is in

“ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.

Select the mirror to adjust 

(“L”: left or “R”: right)

Adjust the mirror up, down, in, or out using the switch

Folding the mirrors

Press the switch

Pressing again will extend the mirrors.

■ When the mirrors are fogged up

Turn on the mirror heaters to defog the mirrors. ( 

P. 199)

■ Auto anti-glare function

When the inside rear view mirror is set to “AUTO” mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. ( 

P. 47)

48


■ Linked mirror function when reversing

The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (neither “L” nor

“R” selected).

■ One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle 

(vehicles with driving position memory)

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch of a button. ( 

P. 35)

1

CAUTION


Observe the following precautions.



Failing to do so may result in losing control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the mirrors.

● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.

● Before driving, be sure to extend mirrors and make an adjustment properly.

■ When the mirror heaters are operating

Do not touch the mirror surface as the mirror surface becomes hot.

And do not touch the mirror surface also when the wiper switch is on at lower than

77  F (25  C) of the outside temperature.

NOTICE

■ If ice should jam the mirror

Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the mirror.

49

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows

The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches.

Closing

One-touch closing *

Opening

One-touch opening *

* : Pushing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway.

Lock switch

Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

■ The power windows can be operated when

The power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

■ Linked door lock window operation

● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. 

( 

P. 474)

● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. (

 P. 22)

50

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ Operating the power windows after turning the power switch “OFF”

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the power switch is switched to “ACC” mode or turned “OFF”. They cannot, however, be operated once the driver’s or front passenger’s door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

■ When the 12 volt battery is disconnected

The power windows must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation. 

(Perform for each window with the switch for each seat.)

STEP 1

STEP 2

Open the window halfway.

Fully close the window by pulling the switch up and continue holding the switch for 1 second.

The indicator on the switch changes from a flashing pattern to being on when initializing are complete.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. ( 

P. 512)

1

CAUTION

■ When closing the windows

Observe the following precautions. 

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the power windows. 

Closing a power window on someone can cause death or serious injury.


● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.

51

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof (if equipped)

Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down.

■ Opening and closing

Open

Stops just before it is opened fully. Press the switch again to fully open.

Close

To stop partway, press the switch lightly.

■ Tilt up and down

Tilt up

Tilt down

To stop partway, press the switch lightly.

52


■ The moon roof can be operated when


■ Linked door lock moon roof operation

● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. ( 

P. 474)

● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (

 P. 22)

■ Operating the moon roof after turning the power switch “OFF”

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the power switch is switched to “ACC” mode or turned “OFF”. It cannot, however, be operated once the driver’s door is opened.


If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

■ If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically

Keep the switch depressed.

■ To reduce moon roof wind noise

Drive with the moon roof opened automatically (just before fully opened position).

■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. ( 

P. 512)

1

53


CAUTION

■ When opening the moon roof




Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■ When closing the moon roof

Observe the following precautions. 

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. 

Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.


● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.

54

1-6. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.

■ Before refueling the vehicle

Turn the power switch “OFF” and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.

■ Opening the fuel tank cap

STEP 1

Press the fuel filler door opener switch.

1

STEP 2

STEP 3

The screen to the left is displayed for a short period. Wait until “REFUEL READY” is displayed, then proceed to the next step.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.

55

1-6. Refueling

STEP 4

Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap clockwise until you hear a click. The cap will revolve slightly in the opposite direction once released.

■ Fuel types

Use premium unleaded gasoline. (91 Octane Rating [Research Octane Number

96] or higher)

■ Fuel tank capacity

Approximately 17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 Imp. gal.)

■ Open fuel filler door warning

 P. 456

56

1-6. Refueling

■ When the fuel filler door opener switch is inoperable

If the fuel filler door opener switch is inoperable, contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. If you must refuel your vehicle, you can open the fuel filler door manually as shown. The system to lower internal pressure may not be functioning so you must turn the cap slowly as the pressure releases. In addition, fuel may spill out during refueling. Fill the fuel tank carefully and slowly.

1

CAUTION

■ When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so, may result in death or serious injury.

● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.



Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. 

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.



Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.



Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.



This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

57

1-6. Refueling

CAUTION

■ When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.

Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Refueling

● Finish refueling within 30 minutes. If more than 30 minutes passes, the internal valve closes. In this condition, fuel may overflow during the refueling process.

Press the fuel filler door opener switch again.

● Do not spill fuel during refueling. 

Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

58

1-7. Theft deterrent system

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid system from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer. 

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator light flashes after the power switch has been turned “OFF” to indicate that the system is operating.

1

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of hybrid vehicle immobilizer system.

■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object.

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle.

■ Certifications for the hybrid vehicle immobilizer system


FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1




59

1-7. Theft deterrent system

CAUTION

■ Certifications for the hybrid vehicle immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE

■ For proper system operation

Do not modify, remove or disable the hybrid vehicle immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

60


Alarm

The alarm warns of forcible entry using the horn and lights.

To arm the alarm, exit the vehicle, make sure that the doors, trunk and hood are closed, and lock all the doors.



The system will operate automatically once the indicator changes from lit to flashing.

1

Deactivating or stopping the alarm

Do one of the following:

● Unlock the doors or trunk using the smart access system with pushbutton start or the wireless remote control.

● Start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

■ Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, check that there is no one in the vehicle, and that all windows and moon roof are closed before locking the vehicle.

61

1-7. Theft deterrent system


Be sure to cancel the alarm system. 

If the 12 volt battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be triggered when the battery is reconnected.

■ Panic mode

When is pushed for longer than about one second, the headlights/tail lights/emergency flashers will flash, the front and rear interior lights will come on, and an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control.

62


Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)

These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.

1

63

1-8. Safety information

Correct driving posture

Drive with a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in the seat.

Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (

 P. 33)

Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable.

Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest. 

( 

P. 46)

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (

 P. 39)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

( 

P. 40)

64

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION


● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.



Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.



A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

● Do not place anything under the front seats.



Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

■ Adjusting the seat position

● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion, to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. 

If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.

● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.



Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

1

65


SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

66

Front airbags

Driver airbag/front passenger airbag 

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.

Knee airbag 

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.

Side and curtain shield airbags

Front side airbag/rear side airbag (rear side airbags are optional) 

Can help protect the torso of the front occupants and rear outboard occupants.


Curtain shield airbag 

Can help protect primarily the head of front occupants and rear outboard occupants.

Airbag system components

1

Occupant detection system

(ECU and sensors)

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

Knee airbag

Front passenger airbag

Curtain shield airbag

Front side airbag

Side and curtain shield airbag sensor

Curtain shield airbag sensor

SRS warning light

Rear side airbag (if equipped)

Driver airbag

Driver's seat belt buckle switch

Driver's seat position sensor

“AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG

OFF” indicator lights

Airbag sensor assembly

Front airbag sensor

67


Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver's seat position sensor etc. The front passenger's airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.

In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)

SRS airbag.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front pillar and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The windshield may crack.

68


■ Operating conditions (front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

● The SRS front passenger airbags will not activate, if there is not passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy, if the heavy luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.

■ Operating conditions (side and curtain shield airbags)

● The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side.

● The SRS front side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if the heavy luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. ( 

P. 77)

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

● Landing hard or vehicle falling

1

69


■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

● Collision from the side

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag 

(side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

● Collision from the front

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

70


■ When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the 12 volt battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.

● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the

SRS airbags to inflate.

1

● A portion of the doors is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel, front passenger airbag cover or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

71


CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.



The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

72


CAUTION


● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver's seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver's airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.

( 

P. 82)

1

73


CAUTION


● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

● Do not allow a child to sit on the knees of a front passenger while the vehicle is moving.

● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger have items resting on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the front passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

74


CAUTION


● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

1

● Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.

● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag

components shown on P. 67. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer.

75


CAUTION

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy

(inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rail

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment

● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.)

● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system

● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players

● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

76


Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.

1

SRS warning light

“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light

“AIRBAG ON” indicator light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

■ Adult

*1

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

“AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights

“AIRBAG

ON”

SRS warning light Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing *2

Front passenger airbag and knee airbag

Side airbag in the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag on the front passenger side

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

77


■ Child

*3

or child restraint system

*4


Devices


“AIRBAG

OFF”

*5

SRS warning light Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing *2





Deactivated

Activated

■ Unoccupied


Devices


SRS warning light


Not illuminated

Off



Deactivated


Activated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Deactivated

78


■ System malfunction


Devices


SRS warning light






“AIRBAG

OFF”

On

Off

Deactivated

Activated

*

1

: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/ her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*

*

2

3

: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

: When a large child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.

*

4

: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. 

( 

P. 82)

*

5

: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for installing the child restraint system properly. (

 P. 85)

1

79


CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.

● Wear the seat belt properly.

● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

● Make sure the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger side may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment.

● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear seat.

● Do not let a rear seat passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

80


CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is illuiminated. If the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator still remain illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. ( 

P. 85)

● Do not remove the front seat.

● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction in the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

1

81


Child restraint systems

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.

● Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of the child.

● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system. 

General installation instructions are provided in this manual. ( 

P. 85)

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child.

Infant seat

82

Convertible seat

Booster seat


1

■ When the child restraint system is not in use

Leave the child restraint system properly secured on the seat. Do not store the restraint loosely on a passenger seat or in the trunk.

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

Get an appropriate child restraint system for the child. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. 

( 

P. 40)

83


CAUTION

■ Child restraint precautions

● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.

● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system should allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

84


Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the outboard rear seats using a seat belt or a child restraint lower anchor belt. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint.

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (

 P. 42)

1

Child restraint lower anchorages

Lower anchorages are provided for the outboard rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchorages are attached to the seats.)

Anchor bracket 

(for top strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for all rear seats.

85


Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

■ Rear facing child seat  Infant/convertible

STEP 1

Place the child seat on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Run the seat belt through the infant seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.

86


STEP 4

While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

1

■ Forward facing  Convertible child seat

STEP 1

Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder strap and then allow it to retract slightly into the ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.

87


STEP 4

■ Booster seat

STEP 1

STEP 2

While pushing the child seat into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the child seat. Fit the seat belt to the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (

 P. 40)

88


Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

1

Installation with child restraint lower anchorages

Type A

STEP 1

STEP 2

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the anchorages.

If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchorage.

For owners in Canada: 

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower anchorage system.

Canada only

89


Type B

STEP 1

STEP 2

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.

If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchorage.

For owners in Canada: 

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower anchorage system.

Canada only

Child restraint systems with a top strap

STEP 1

Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or lower anchors, and lock the head restraint in place at the lowest position.

90

STEP 2


Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.

Make sure the top strap is securely latched.

1

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

Anchorages conform to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.



Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.



This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

CAUTION

■ When installing a booster seat

Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode: ( 

P. 42)

● ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child.

● Do not allow the child to play with the seat belt or the child could be killed or serious injured.

91


CAUTION

■ When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.



If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

● Only put a forward facing or booster child seat on the front seat when unavoidable.

When installing a forward facing or booster child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

● Ensure the belt and tab are securely locked and that the seat belt is not twisted.

● Push and pull the child seat in different directions to be sure it is secure.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

92


CAUTION

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision.

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchorages

When using the lower anchorages, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchorages and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child seat. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

1

93


94

When driving

2

2-1. Driving procedures.................. 96

Driving the vehicle....................... 96

Starting the hybrid system...... 103

Transmission ................................. 106

Turn signal lever ........................... 110

Parking brake.................................. 111

2-3. Operating the lights and  windshield wipers................. 122

Headlight switch.......................... 122

Fog light switch ........................... 125

Windshield wipers and  washer .......................................... 126

Headlight cleaner switch........ 128

2-2. Instrument cluster.................... 112

Gauges and meters .................... 112

Indicators and warning  lights................................................ 116

Multi-information display.......... 119

2-4. Using other driving  systems.................................... 129

Cruise control .............................. 129

Dynamic radar cruise  control ......................................... 132

Intuitive parking assist................ 141

Rear view monitor system ...... 160


Suspension System)............... 163

Driving assist systems............... 164

PCS (Pre-Collision 

System)......................................... 169

2-5. Driving information................ 172

Cargo and luggage.................... 172

Vehicle load limits ....................... 175

Winter driving tips ...................... 176

Trailer towing.................................. 181

Dinghy towing ............................. 182

95

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.

■ Starting the hybrid system ( 

P. 103)

■ Driving

STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to “D”. 

( 

P. 106)

STEP 2 Release the parking brake. (

 P. 111)

STEP 3

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently push the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

■ Stopping

STEP 1

With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.

STEP 2

If necessary, set the parking brake.

When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to “P”. (

 P. 106)

■ Parking the vehicle

STEP 1 With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.

STEP 2 Set the parking brake.

STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to “P”.

STEP 4 Stop the hybrid system.

STEP 5

(

(





P. 111)

P. 106)

Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

Starting on a steep incline

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to “D”.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

96

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Breaking in your new Lexus

To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe:

● For the first 186 miles (300 km): 

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in the low range in the “S” position.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. ( 

P. 488)

■ For efficient use

● Put the shift lever into “D” when driving 

In the “N” position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. The hybrid battery (traction battery) will be discharged requiring unnecessary engine power to recharge.

● Drive your vehicle smoothly 

Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the traction motor without having to use gasoline engine power.

● Avoid repeated acceleration 

Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released.

● Put the shift lever into “P” when parking 

In the “N” position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge.



Leaving the shift lever in the “N” position for an extended period of the time may discharge the hybrid battery. The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid battery is discharged.

■ When starting on an incline

The hill-start assist control may operate. (

 P. 164)

2

97


CAUTION

■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid system running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. 

Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

● The driver should pay attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only by the electric motor (traction motor). Because there is no engine sounds, the pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle’s movement.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in “R”.



Doing so may cause the hybrid system not to operate or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the trunk is closed. 

Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and eventually, death. Have the cause of the problem inspected immediately.

98


CAUTION


● Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to “P”, “R” or “N” while the vehicle is moving.



Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to “N” while the vehicle is moving.



Doing so may cause the engine brake not to operate properly and lead to an accident.

● Do not turn the hybrid system off while driving. 

The brake actuator will not operate properly if the hybrid system is off.

● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. 

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. ( 

P. 108)

● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.

● Be careful when driving on slippery surfaces, as the vehicle may spin or skid when downshifting, rapidly accelerating, braking or turning.

● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.



Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury.

● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

2

99


CAUTION

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.



This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

■ When the vehicle is stopped

● Do not race the hybrid system.



If the vehicle is in any positions other than “P” or “N” the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time. 

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the hybrid system is operating to prevent an accident caused by the vehicle moving.

■ When the vehicle is parked

● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.



Failure to do so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to “P”, stop the hybrid system and lock the vehicle.



Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the hybrid system is operating.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the hybrid system is operating or immediately after turning the hybrid system off. 

Doing so may cause burns.

● Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build up, or where snow is expected to fall. 

Exhaust gases may enter the vehicle and cause gas poisoning.

100


CAUTION

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the hybrid system off. 

Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or press the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to abnormal hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle and cause gas poisoning.

■ When braking the vehicle

● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.



Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

● If the brake actuator does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhill or sharp turns that require making. 

In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.

● Do not pump the brake pedal if the hybrid system is not operating. 

Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved brake fluid pressure.

● The brake system consists of 3 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.



Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

2

101


NOTICE

■ While driving the vehicle

Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always put the shift lever in “P”. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long time. 

Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.



The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

Front brake only: Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.



It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.

● The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Replace a flat tire with a new one. ( 

P. 464)

102


Starting the hybrid system

Modes can be switched by pressing the power switch when carrying the electronic key on your person. (The hybrid system can be started in any mode by operating the switch at the same time as depressing the brake pedal.)

■ Changing power switch mode

“OFF” mode*

Emergency flashers can be used.

“ACC” mode

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

“IG-ON” mode

All electrical components can be used.

*: The power cannot be switched to “OFF” unless the shift lever is in

“P”.

■ Starting the hybrid system

STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.

STEP 2 Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.

STEP 3 Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.

STEP 4 Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.

The power switch indicator turns green.

STEP 5

Press the power switch.

After a few seconds, the

“READY” light will flash and come on with a beep sound.

The vehicle can move when the

“READY” light is on, even if the engine is stopped.

2

103


■ If the hybrid system does not start

The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. ( 

P. 59)

■ When the power switch indicator flashes in amber

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ If the “READY” light does not come on

If the “READY” light does not come on when you press the power switch with the shift lever in “P” and the brake pedal pressed, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ Auto power OFF function

If the vehicle is left in the “ACC” mode for more than an hour with the shift lever in

“P”, the power switch will automatically turn “OFF”.

■ When the ambient temperature is low

Such as during winter driving conditions, it may take time until the “READY” light comes on.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

 P. 4

■ When the hybrid system is malfunctioning

 P. 450

■ Electronic key battery depletion

 P. 17

■ When the electronic key battery is discharged

 P. 401


 P. 15

■ Leak detection pump

Several hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear a sound coming from underneath the luggage compartment for several minutes. This is normal operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

104


CAUTION

■ When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.



Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.


Do not touch the power switch while driving. 

Pressing and holding the power switch will stop the hybrid system, which may lead to an accident.

2

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge

Do not leave the power switch in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode for long periods without the hybrid system on.

■ When starting the hybrid system

● Do not race the hybrid system.

● If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have the hybrid system checked immediately.

105


Transmission

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■ Shifting the shift lever

While the power switch is in “IG-ON” mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.

106


■ Shift position uses

Shift position

P

R

N

D

S

Function

Parking the vehicle or starting the hybrid system

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving * 1

“S” mode driving * 2

(

 P. 108)

* 1 : To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the

“D” position for normal driving.

*

2

: By selecting shift ranges using “S” mode, you can control engine braking forces.

■ Selecting a driving mode

The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving and operating conditions.

Power mode

For powerful acceleration and driving in mountainous regions.

Normal mode

Snow mode

For accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow.

Press “SNOW” to return to normal mode.

2

107


Changing shift ranges in “S” mode

Shift the shift lever to the “S” position and operate the shift lever.

Upshifting

Downshifting

The initial shift range in “S” mode is automatically set to “5”.

■ Shift ranges and their functions

● You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.

● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.

● If you accelerate while in ranges “1” to “5”, the shift range may automatically range up in accordance with the vehicle's speed.

■ Downshifting restrictions in “S” mode

The shift lever cannot be downshifted if the following speeds are exceeded. (The warning buzzer will sound twice in this situation.)

Downshifting

5  4

4  3

3  2

2  1

Maximum speed mph (km/h)

108 (173)

78 (125)

58 (94)

34 (55)

108


■ When in heavy traffic

To avoid running the hybrid battery (traction battery) down, leave the shift lever in

“D” or “S”.

■ When driving with the cruise control system (or dynamic radar cruise control system)

The engine brake will not operate in the “S” mode, even when downshifting to “5” or

“4”. (

 P. 129, 132)

■ Snow mode automatic deactivation

Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned to “ACC” or

“IG-ON” mode after driving in snow mode.

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”

 P. 472

■ If the indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to “S”

This may indicate a malfunction in the transmission. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. 

(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in “D”.)

2

109


Turn signal lever

Left turn

Right turn

Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change

The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever.

Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change

The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever.

■ Turn signals can be operated when


■ If the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

110


Parking brake

U.S.A.

Canada

Sets the parking brake * 

(Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.)

*

: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot.

2

NOTICE

■ Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.



Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

111

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

112

The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target region.

The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

Power meter

Displays the instantaneous output from the hybrid system is approximate kilowatts.

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature.


 P. 119

2-2. Instrument cluster

Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button

Changes the display

Resets the trip meter driving range to “0”.

2

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights excluding the clock and outside temperature display, can be adjusted.

Brighter

Darker

Maximum brightness

113


Light sensitive optitron meter

To reduce glare or reflection of the instrument cluster, the cluster glass is tinted automatically or manually. You can select a setting from 7 modes.

Display the present setting, then change the mode.

To change the mode, press the button once and then again within 6 seconds.



Each time you press the button, the mode changes in the following order;

1. “AUTO - Norm”

2. “AUTO - Lo”

3. “AUTO - Hi”

4. “MANUAL - 1”

5. “MANUAL - 2”

6. “MANUAL - 3”

7. “MANUAL - 4”

Mode 1 to 3: The cluster glass tint will be adjusted automatically depending on the intensity of sunlight in the surrounding.



Mode 4 to 7: The cluster glass tint will be fixed when a certain level of sunlight is reached in the surrounding.



(“Norm” to “Hi”, “1” to “4” referring to the level of cluster glass tint.)

114


NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (“H”). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Check the engine after it has cooled completely. (

 P. 480)

■ To activate the light sensitivity function properly

Do not affix a sticker or window tint to the rear window glass, or put an object behind the rear seat.

2

115


Indicators and warning lights

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

Instrument cluster

The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.

Center panel

116


■ Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.

(U.S.A.)

Turn signal indicator 

( 

P. 110)

Headlight high beam indicator ( 

P. 122)

Headlight indicator 

( 

P. 122)

Cruise control indicator 

(

 P. 129)

Damping mode indicator 

(

 P. 163)

* “AFS OFF” indicator 

(

 P. 123)

Tail light indicator 

( 

P. 122)

(Canada)

Fog light indicator 

( 

P. 125)

(if equipped)

Intuitive parking assist indicator (

 P. 142)

*

Slip indicator ( 

P. 165)

Shift position and shift range indicators 

( 

P. 108)

“Hybrid SNOW”  indicator ( 

P. 107)

“Hybrid PWR” indicator 

( 

P. 107)

* “AIRBAG ON” and “AIR-

BAG OFF” indicators 

(

 P. 77)

Driving ready indicator

(

 P. 103)

2

117


■ Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems. ( 

P. 438)

* * * * * * *

(U.S.A.)

*

(Canada)

*

(U.S.A.)

*

(Canada)

*

(U.S.A.) (Canada)

*

(if equipped)

*

* : These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to “IG-ON” mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION

■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS airbag warning light not come on when you turn to “IG-ON” mode, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

118


Multi-information display

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data, including the status of the hybrid system.

● Energy monitor ( 

P. 6)

Displays the status of the hybrid system.

● Trip information ( 

P. 120)

Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising related information.

● Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped) (

 P. 143)

Automatically displayed when using intuitive parking assist.

● Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped) 

( 

P. 132)

Automatically displayed when using dynamic radar cruise control.

● Warning messages 

(

 P. 444)

Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems.

2

119


Display items can be switched by pushing the “DISP” switch.

Trip information

■ Driving range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

■ Average fuel consumption after refueling

Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled.

■ Current fuel consumption

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

120


■ Average vehicle speed

Displays the average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was last started.

■ System check display

The “LEXUS HYBRID DRIVE” message is displayed 3 seconds after the power switch is set to the “IG-ON” mode. At this time a systems check is conducted, and the normal display is shown upon successful completion of this check.

2

CAUTION

■ The multi-information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

121

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

U.S.A.

Canada

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.

The headlights and all the lights listed above turn on and off automatically.



(When the power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.)

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams.

Release to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

122

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

AFS (Adaptive Front lighting System)

AFS improves visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the level of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle that are controlled by steering input.

Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.

■ Deactivating AFS

Press the switch to turn it OFF.

The indicator turns on when the AFS is deactivated.

2

■ Daytime running light system

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the hybrid system is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.

■ Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. 

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

123


■ Automatic light off system

The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after all doors are closed if the power switch has been switched to “ACC” or turned “OFF” while the headlights are turned on. (The lights turn off immediately if the button on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.)

To turn the lights on again, switch to “IG-ON” mode, or turn the light switch “OFF” once and then back to the or position.

■ Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.

■ If the indicator flashes...

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. ( 

P. 510)

NOTICE


Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

124


Fog light switch

The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.

OFF

ON

2

125


Windshield wipers and washer

■ Rain-sensing windshield wipers

With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

Sensor sensitivity (low)

Sensor sensitivity (high)

Rain-sensing wiper operation

Low speed wiper operation

High speed wiper operation

Temporary operation

Wash/wipe operation

■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when


■ Dripping prevention wiper sweep

After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.

However, the last sweep will not happen if the vehicle is traveling above 106 mph

(170 km/h).

■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation

With the settings other than “AUTO” also, the time until drip prevention wiper sweep occurs is changed depending on vehicle speed.

With “LO” selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.

126

■ Rain drop sensor


The sensor judges the amount of raindrops.

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

■ In extremely hot or cold weather

The system will turn off if the windshield gets extremely hot (at more than 176  F

[80  C]) or cold (at less than 14  F [-10  C]).

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed. ( 

P. 510)

2

CAUTION

■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.

127


Headlight cleaner switch

Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.

Press the switch to clean the headlights.

■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when

The power switch is in “IG-ON” mode and the headlight switch is turned ON.

NOTICE

■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not use this function, as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

128

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator.

■ Set the vehicle speed

STEP 1 Turn the “ON-OFF” button ON.

Push the button once more to deactivate the cruise control.

2

STEP 2

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set the cruise control speed.

■ Adjusting the speed setting

Increase speed

Decrease speed

Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is obtained.

Fine adjustment of the set speed

(approximately 1.0 mph [1.6 km/ h]) can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.

129

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Canceling and resuming regular acceleration

Cancel

Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.

The setting is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.

Resume

To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.

■ Cruise control can be set when

● The shift lever is in the “D” or “4”, “5”, or “6” range of “S”.

● Vehicle speed is between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and 125 mph

(200 km/h).

■ Accelerating

The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

■ Automatic cruise control cancelation

The set speed is automatically canceled in any of the following situations.

● Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed

● Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h)

● VSC is activated

■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes

Turn the “ON-OFF” button off once, and then reactivate the system. 

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

130


CAUTION

■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.



Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or fatal accident.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep hills

● On winding roads

2

131


Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)

Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.

■ Select cruise mode

Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Turn the “ON-OFF” button

ON.

Push the button once more to deactivate.

Selecting conventional constant speed control mode

Turn the “ON-OFF” button

ON.

Switch to constant speed control mode.



(Push and hold for approximately 1 second.)

Push the button once more to deactivate.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when the power switch is switched to

“IG-ON” mode.

132


■ Driving in the selected cruise control mode

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set.

■ Adjusting the speed setting

Increase speed

Decrease speed

Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is displayed.

In the constant speed control mode, fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph

[1.6 km/h]) can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.

■ Canceling and resuming the speed setting

Cancel

Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.

The setting is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.

Resume

To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.

133

2


■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Preceding vehicle mark

Each pull of the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long

Medium

Short

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is automatically set to the long mode when the power switch is set to the “IG-ON” mode.

A vehicle mark is displayed ahead if one is detected.

134


Cruising in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles within 400 ft. (120 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your vehicle and those vehicles.

Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long downhill slopes.

2

Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles ahead): When vehicle speed is set at 62 mph (100 km/h)

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed): When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph

(100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.

135


Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed): When the speed is set at 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)

The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.

Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving slower than the set speed in the lane ahead): When the speed is set at

62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80 km/ h) is out of the lane

When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to fixed speed cruising.

■ Dynamic radar cruise control warning lights, messages and buzzers

Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to alert you to the need for caution while driving. (

 P. 446)

■ The dynamic radar cruise can be set when

● The shift lever is in “D” or the “4”, “5” or “6” range of “S”.

● Vehicle speed is between approximately 27 mph (43 km/h) and 87 mph (139 km/h).

■ Accelerating

The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

136


■ Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations.

● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)


● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed

● The mode select switch is set to snow mode

● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way 

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving must be reset by turning the “ON-

OFF” button on again.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Automatically canceling constant speed control

The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.

● Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed

● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)


■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/ decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.

Distance options

Long

Medium

Short

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Approximately 210 ft. (65 m)



2

137


■ Radar sensor and grille cover

Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.) 

Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.

Grille cover

Radar sensor

■ Certification


FCC WARNING


FCC RF exposure information

This device complies with the FCC RF exposure requirements.


Operation is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

138


CAUTION

■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control

Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.



Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.

■ To avoid operating the dynamic radar cruise control by mistake

Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.



Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or fatal accident.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients

● At entrances to expressways

● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)

● Where buzzer can be heard often

2

139


CAUTION

■ When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you.



As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the proximity alarm ( 

P. 453) will not be activated, and an accident may result.

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly

● Vehicles traveling at low speeds

● Vehicles that are not moving

● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)

● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly

Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.

● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the functioning of the sensor

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.)

● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable

■ To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly

Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident.

● Stick or attach anything to them

● Leave them dirty

● Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks

● Modify or paint them

● Replace them with non-genuine parts

140


Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)

Intuitive parking assist uses sensors in the front and rear of the vehicle to detect the distance between the vehicle and any obstacles, and informs the driver of this distance using the multi-information display, the touch screen, and warning beeps.



The system may be used at speeds less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).

■ Sensor types

2

Dual sensors

There are 4 sensors installed in the front bumper, two in the center section to detect obstacles directly ahead, and one in each corner of the bumper, to detect obstacles in those areas.



The dual sensors detect obstacles ahead of the vehicle, and judge whether avoidance maneuvers are necessary (whether the obstacle will come within 0.8 ft. [25 cm] of the vehicle), according to the distance between the obstacle and the vehicle, and the steering wheel position. The screen display and beeps will change accordingly.

Rear corner sensors

These sensors detect obstacles around the rear corners of the vehicle.

Back sensors

These sensors detect obstacles behind the vehicle.

141


■ Intuitive parking assist switch

Press the switch to turn the system on/off.

If the intuitive parking assist is turned on, the indicator light will come on, and the system will operate under the following conditions:

• The dual sensors will operate if the shift lever is in a position other than “R” or

“P”.

• All corner sensors and the back sensors will operate if the shift lever is in “R”.

142


Multi-information display and touch screen

If the sensors detect an obstacle, it is displayed on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster.



You can change the conditions under which information is displayed on the touch screen. (

 P. 155)


Dual sensor detection

Steering guide symbol

Rear corner sensor detection

Back sensor detection

2

Touch screen

Dual sensor detection




If the intuitive parking assist is operated while the rear view monitor is showing, the intuitive parking assist will be shown in the upper right corner of the screen. 

( 

P. 146)

143


Sensor detection display, obstacle distance and beeps

When the intuitive parking assist is activated, the approximate distance to the obstacle is displayed. Also, if an obstacle with which a collision is possible is detected, a warning beep will sound.

■ Dual sensor

Touch screen

Approximate distance to obstacle


With beeps

(danger of collision)

No beeps

(no danger of collision)

3.0 ft. (100 cm) to 1.5 ft. (50 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (continuous)

1.5 ft. (50 cm) to

1.1 ft. (37.5 cm)


1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to

0.8 ft. (25 cm)


Less than 0.8 ft.

(25 cm)



(blinking) (continuous)

• If the shift lever is in “R”, only the corner sensors will detect obstacles.

144


■ Rear corner sensor


1.5 ft. (50 cm) to 1.1 ft.

(37.5 cm)


(continuous)

1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft.

(25 cm)

(continuous)

Less than 0.8 ft. (25 cm)

(blinking)

■ Back sensor


5.0 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)


(continuous)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.4 ft.

(45 cm)

(continuous)

1.4 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft.

(35 cm)

(continuous)


(blinking)

Touch screen

(continuous)

(continuous)

(continuous)

Touch screen

(continuous)

(continuous)

(continuous)

(continuous)

145

2


Touch screen (insert display)

Dual sensor (corner) detection



The tire display and the steering guide symbol will not be displayed.

■ Dual sensor


With beeps

(danger of collision)

No beeps

(no danger of collision)

3.0 ft. (100 cm) to 1.5 ft.

(50 cm)

(blinking slowly) (continuous)

1.5 ft. (50 cm) to 1.1 ft.

(37.5 cm)

(blinking) (continuous)

1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft.

(25 cm)

(blinking rapidly) (continuous)


(continuous)



146


■ Rear corner sensor


1.5 ft. (50 cm) to 1.1 ft. (37.5 cm)

1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft. (25 cm)


■ Back sensor


5.0 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.4 ft. (45 cm)

1.4 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft. (35 cm)


Touch screen

(blinking)

(blinking rapidly)

(continuous)

Touch screen

(blinking slowly)

(blinking)

(blinking rapidly)

(continuous)

2

147



Displays the steering maneuvers required to avoid an obstacle. Move the steering wheel in the direction shown by the arrow.


Touch screen

The steering guide symbol only shows the maneuvers necessary to avoid an obstacle.



When using the system, always check your surroundings for safety.

148


Beeps and obstacle distance

A beep sounds when an obstacle with which there is a danger of collision is detected. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the interval of the beep becomes shorter.

● When the following obstacle distances are reached, the beep changes from intermittent to continuous:

• If the distance to the obstacle detected by the dual sensors or rear corner sensors is less than 0.8 ft. (25 cm).

• If the distance to the obstacle detected by the back sensors is less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm).

● If obstacles are detected by the dual sensors in 2 places at once, or if both rear corner sensors detect obstacles at the same time, the system will sound a warning beep for the closer of the 2 obstacles.

● If multiple obstacles are detected in front and behind the vehicle at the same time, the warning beep will change in the following manner:

• If an obstacle has been detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the front or rear of the vehicle (a continuous beep is sounding), and a new obstacle is detected near a different area of the vehicle, the warning beep will sound

6 beeps then one continuous beep.

• If an obstacle has been detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the front or rear of the vehicle (a continuous beep is sounding), and a new obstacle is detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of a different area of the vehicle, the warning beeps will sound 2 beeps then one continuous beep.

● You can change the volume of the warning beeps. (

 P. 155)

2

149


Obstacle detection range

About 10.0 ft. (300 cm)

About 3.0 ft. (100 cm)



The detection area of the sensors is shown to the left.



If obstacles move too close to the sensors, they will not be detected.



If the malfunction screen is displayed, the dual sensor detection range will be shortened from 3.0 ft.

(100 cm) to 1.5 ft. (50 cm).

150

If there is snow or mud on a sensor



Touch screen

The same symbol will appear on the insert display.

The location of the affected sensor is displayed. Wipe off whatever is stuck to the sensor. (The above illustration shows something on the left front sensor.) 

If the message is displayed even though the sensor is not dirty or you have already cleaned it, there is most likely a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

2

151


If a sensor is malfunctioning


Touch screen

The same symbol will appear on the insert display.

The location of the malfunctioning sensor is displayed. (The above illustration shows a malfunctioning left front sensor.) Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

152


If the steering neutral position is unknown

After the 12 volt battery has been reconnected, the steering sensor will need to be initialized. At this time, if the dual sensors detect an obstacle, the steering guide symbol and both arrows will be displayed.

2


Touch screen

Use one of the following methods to initialize the steering sensor.

• With the vehicle stopped, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, then the right. (The order is not important.)

• Drive for more than 5 minutes on an un-crowded road with as few curves and corners as possible.

If the steering guide symbol disappears, the steering sensor has been initialized. If the steering guide symbol does not disappear, have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

153


If the steering information is not being correctly received

If the system is unable to receive signals from the steering sensor, or there is a malfunction in the VGRS, the steering guide symbol and both arrows will flash if the dual sensors detect an obstacle.



In this case, have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.


Touch screen

If the steering guide symbol is on or flashing, the intuitive parking assist maximum detection range is reduced from 3.0 ft. (100 cm) to 1.5 ft. (50 cm).



The steering sensor malfunction warning display will be aligned with the intuitive parking assist detection display or the intuitive parking assist malfunction warning display.

154


Warning beep volume and touch screen settings

You can change the warning beep volume and touch screen operating conditions.



Press to display the “Information” screen. Then touch .

■ Changing the warning beep volume

STEP 1

Touch .

STEP 2 Adjust the beep volume, then touch .

■ Changing the touch screen operating conditions

STEP 1 Touch .

STEP 2

●

Set one of the following operating condition, then touch

: Displays when the sensors detect an obstacle.

●

.

: Displays if maneuvers are required to avoid an obstacle (if an obstacle is likely to come within 0.8 ft. [25 cm] of the vehicle).

● : Does not display the intuitive parking assist detection screen.

When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the top right of the screen even has been selected.

2

155


■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when

The power switch is in the “IG-ON” mode.

■ When the system malfunctions

● If a malfunction occurs and no obstacles have been detected, a warning is displayed, and a malfunction beep sounds for 7 seconds.



If an obstacle has been detected, or another malfunction occurs in a different sensor, the malfunction beeps will not sound.

● In the following circumstances the displayed warning will disappear:

• If you switch the screen to a different mode.

• If you turn OFF the intuitive parking assist main switch.

• If the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). Once the vehicle speed drops below 6 mph (10 km/h), the warning will be displayed again.

● If the malfunction screen is displayed, the detection range of the dual sensors is shortened. In this case, the necessity for obstacle evasion (whether the obstacle will come within 0.8 ft. [25 cm] of the vehicle or not) will not be calculated.

■ When using intuitive parking assist

● The sensors' detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.

• The sensors' detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s front and rear bumpers.

• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.

• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the vehicle before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds.

• Braking distance may differ according to the road conditions (rain, gravel etc.).

• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow noise of air conditioning system.

• For long obstacles such as walls, the obstacle warning may change as the obstacle gets closer.

156


● In the following situations, the intuitive parking assist may not function correctly, possibly leading to an accident.

• There is ice, snow or mud on the sensors. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this problem.)

• The sensor area is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.) 

In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal display, or obstacles may not be detected.

• The vehicle angle is especially wide.

• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.

• When driving on bumpy, sloped or gravel roads, or over grass.

• If there is something producing ultrasonic waves nearby, such as another vehicle’s horn, motorcycle engine noise, air braking sound from heavy-duty vehicles, or another vehicle using the intuitive parking assist.

• In heavy rain, or if water is splashed on the sensors.

• If a commercial fender pole or radio antenna is installed.

• If towing eyelet is installed on your vehicle.

• If moving towards a high curb or a curb corner.

• Objects such as signs may cause the detection distance to shorten.

• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.



Objects lower than the sensors or thin stakes etc. may be detected initially, but as they draw closer, they may cease to be detected.

• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.

■ Obstacles that may not be detected correctly

The following obstacles may not be detected.

● Thin objects such as wire, fencing or rope.

● Objects that absorb sound waves, such as cotton or snow.

● Objects with sharp corners.

● Objects where the upper section projects out over the lower section.

● Low objects.

2

157


■ Certification


This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.


This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.

CAUTION


To reduce the chance of injury in the event of an accident or sudden stop, keep the switch box closed.



● The back sensors and rear corner sensors do not judge whether there is danger of a collision, nor whether the obstacle can be avoided using the steering wheel.

When reversing, always check your surroundings and behind the vehicle for safety.

● The steering guide symbol (arrow) is an approximate guide regarding obstacles.

It is not driving instructions. When moving forward or reversing, always check your surroundings for safety and drive carefully.

● Do not install accessories within the sensors' detection areas, as this may cause the intuitive parking assist to function incorrectly, possibly leading to an accident.

158


NOTICE


In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

● A beep does not sound when you turn the main switch ON.

● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sound when no obstacle has been detected.

● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.

● If the bumper collides with something.

● If the display shows continuously without a beep.

■ When changing tires

If you install tires of a size other than that recommended by the manufacturer, the system will be unable to correctly detect steering wheel movement. Always use tire sizes recommended by the manufacturer.

■ When washing the vehicle

When washing the vehicle using high pressure cleaning equipment, do not spray water directly on the sensors. Subjecting the sensors to high pressure impact may cause a malfunction.

2

159


Rear view monitor system

The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed in reverse on the screen. This allows the image to appear in the same manner as that of the rear view mirror.

Rear view image is displayed when the shift lever is in “R”.

If you move the lever out of “R”, the screen returns to the previous one.

■ Displayed area

Corner of bumper

The area covered by the camera is limited.

Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.

The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions.

160


■ Rear view monitor system camera

In the following cases, it may be difficult to see the images on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly.

• In the dark (e.g. at night).

• If the temperature near the lens is extremely high or low.

• If water droplets get on the camera, or when humidity is high (e.g. when it rains).

• If foreign matter (e.g. snow or mud) get on the camera lens.

• If the sun or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens.

2

■ Smear effect

If a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by the camera, a smear effect* peculiar to the camera may occur.

*: Smear effect—A phenomenon that occurs when a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it.

161


CAUTION

■ When using the rear view monitor system, observe these precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries.

● Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.

● Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.

● Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual distances.

● Do not use the system if the trunk is open.

■ Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system

● If the back of the vehicle is hit, the camera's position and mounting angle may change. Contact your Lexus dealer.

● Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.

● If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.

● The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted when the system is cold.

162


AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension System)

AVS controls the suspension according to the road and driving conditions.

Selecting an optimum driving mode allows good vehicle posture and steering wheel operation in conjunction with VGRS, EPS and active stabilizer suspension system (if equipped).

Sports mode

For winding mountain road driving or high speed driving.

Normal mode

For normal driving.

2

163


Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Restrains the vehicle from slipping when driving on slick road surfaces or in the event of sudden braking.

■ BA (Brake Assist)

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.

■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.

■ TRAC (Traction Control)

Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

■ Hill-start assist control

Helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope. It operates for approximately 5 seconds at maximum.

■ VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering)

Adjusts the wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed and steering wheel movement.

■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel.

■ Active stabilizer suspension system (if equipped)

Turns at smaller angles to maintain the stable vehicle posture.

164


■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)

Provides integrated control of the ABS, VSC, TRAC, hill-start assist control, VGRS and EPS systems.



Maintains vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes, engine output, and the movement of the front wheels.

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)

 P. 169

2

When the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating

If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, rolling backwards when starting on an incline, or if the rear wheels spin, the slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/

TRAC/hill-start assist control systems have been engaged.

A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that VSC is operating.

The stop lights and high mounted stoplight turn on when the hill-start assist control system is operating.

The slip indicator light flashes as well when ABS is operating.

165


To disable TRAC

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

Push the button to turn off TRAC.

The slip indicator light should come on.

Push the button again to turn the system back on.

Once you turn the power switch

“OFF”, TRAC will be activated automatically.

■ Automatic TRAC reactivation

TRAC is reactivated when vehicle speed exceeds 30 mph (50 km/h) even if

“TRAC OFF” has been turned off.

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, BA, VSC, TRAC, hill-start assist control and VGRS systems

● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the hybrid system is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

■ Hill-start assist control is operational when

● The shift lever is in the “D” or “S”.

● The brake pedal is not depressed.

166


■ VGRS is disabled in the following situations

● During stopping or the steering wheel has been moved for a long time while driving at lower speeds.

● After the hybrid system is restarted at less than -22°F (-30°C).

■ Reduced effectiveness of EPS

The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system OFF. The system should return to normal about 10 minutes.

2

CAUTION

Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or serious injury:

■ The ABS does not operate effectively when

● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating on the wet or slick roads

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.

● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

● When driving with tire chains

● When driving over bumps in the road

● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads

■ TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC is operating. 

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

167


CAUTION

■ The hill-start assist control may not operate effectively when

● On steep inclines.

● On icy surfaces.

■ When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully.



Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.

■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the specified tire pressure level.

The ABS and VSC will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.



Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■ Handling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the

VDIM, and may cause the system to malfunction.

168


PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)

Safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle damage when the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision.

■ Pre-collision seat belts (front seats only)

The seat belts are immediately retracted as the effect of the pretensioner is increased ( 

P. 42), to provide even greater constraining force to protect

the driver and passengers. In the event of sudden braking or skidding, the system will operate even if no obstacle has been detected.

■ Pre-collision brake assist

Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

■ Pre-collision AVS

If the system determines that the collision is unavoidable, the operation of

AVS (

 P. 163) helps prevent the vehicle front from going down when

hard brakes are applied.

2

Radar sensor

Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles.

Grille cover

Radar sensor

■ Obstacles not detected

The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.

169


■ The pre-collision system is operational when

● Seat belt (linked to the radar sensor)

• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).

• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.

● Seat belts (linked to brake operation)

• Vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).

• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.

• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.

● Brake Assist



• The brake pedal is depressed.

● AVS



■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision

● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve

● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve

● When driving over a narrow iron bridge

● When there is a metal object on the road surface

● When driving on an uneven road surface

● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn

● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front

When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.

■ When there is a malfunction in the system

Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (



P. 439, 446)

170


CAUTION

■ Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.

● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.



Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.



If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.

● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area.

■ Limitations of the pre-collision system

Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.

2

171

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.

● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.

● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

Capacity and distribution

172

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5  150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.

That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

2-5. Driving information

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (

 P. 175)

Example on your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity 2

When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 815 lb. (370 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:

815 lb. — 366 lb. = 449 lb. (370 kg —166 kg = 204 kg)

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb.

(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:

449 lb. — 388 lb. = 61 lb. (204 kg — 176 kg = 28 kg)

As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occupants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

173


CAUTION

■ Storage precautions

● Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback. 

Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

● Do not drive with objects on top of the instrument panel. 

They may interfere with the driver’s field of view or move during sharp acceleration or turning, thus impairing the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants.

● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during an accident or sudden braking.

■ Weight of the load

● Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control resulting in an accident which may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

174


Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.

■ Total load capacity: 815 lb. (370 kg)

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do not exceed the total load capacity.

■ Towing capacity

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

■ Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

2

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. 

( 

P. 393)

CAUTION

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.



It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

175


Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

■ Pre-winter preparations

● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil

• Engine/inverter coolant

• Washer fluid

● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte.

● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the rear tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

■ Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions.

● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.

● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.

176



Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

■ When parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to “P” without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released.

2

Regulations on the use of snow chains

● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

● Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chains, with the exception of radial cable chains or V-bar type chains.

• Install the chains on the rear tires.

• Refer to the explanation that comes with the tire chains for installation instructions.

● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).

177


Shifting the windshield wiper position

You can shift the wipers to the rest position manually. (In heavy snow or icy condition etc.)

Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper position.

To rest position

Raise the wiper in line with the windshield.

You can stand the wipers up for the rest position.

*: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)

To retract position

Lower the wipers by pressing on the upper part of the hook section.

178


■ Snow chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

● Install tire chains on the rear tires.

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying instructions.

CAUTION

■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. 

Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.

● Maintain the specified level of tire inflation pressure.

● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

● Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.

■ Driving with snow chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. 

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

2

179


NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.



This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■ Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

180


Trailer towing

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

2

181


Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

182

Interior features

3

3-1. Using the touch screen ......... 184

Touch screen................................ 184

Setting the touch screen ......... 187

3-2. Using the air conditioning  system and defogger........... 192

Automatic air conditioning  system .......................................... 192

Rear window and outside rear  view mirror defoggers........... 199

3-3. Using the audio system ....... 200

Audio system type ................... 200

Using the radio........................... 203

Using the cassette player........ 212

Using the CD player................. 216

Playing MP3 and WMA  discs ............................................. 224

Using the DVD player............. 232

Playing DVD video/audio...... 235

Playing video CD...................... 247

DVD player and DVD video  disc information ....................... 251

Optimal use of the audio/  video system............................. 255

Using the steering  switches...................................... 259

3-4. Using the hands-free  system...................................... 261

Hands-free system...................... 261

Using the Bluetooth ®  phone.......................................... 265

Setting the hands-free  system......................................... 278

3-5. Using the interior lights ....... 303

Interior lights list ........................ 303

3-6. Using the storage  features.................................. 306

List of storage features ........... 306

3-7. Other interior features......... 312

Sun visors ...................................... 312

Vanity mirror ................................ 313

Clock............................................... 314

Outside temperature  display.......................................... 315

Ashtrays......................................... 316

Cigarette lighter.......................... 317

Power outlet ................................. 318

Seat heaters ................................. 319

Seat heaters and  ventilators................................... 321

Armrest......................................... 323

Rear sunshade............................ 324

Floor mats .................................... 326

Trunk features............................. 327

Garage door opener............... 329

Compass ....................................... 334

Lexus Link System .................... 338

183

3-1. Using the touch screen

Touch screen

By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the audio system and air-conditioning, adjust the screen display etc.

Vehicles with navigation system

Vehicles without navigation system

184

The “Information” screen shown in the above illustration is displayed when the is pressed.

3-1. Using the touch screen

Switches

“CLIMATE”

“AUDIO”

“INFO” (Displaying the “Information” screen)

“DISP” (Adjusting the display)

Trip Information. (Displaying the

“Trip Information” screen)

Maintenance

Telephone

Calendar

“LEXUS Park Assist”

Language

Screen Setting

Adjust Clock

Page

P. 192

P. 200

P. 184

P. 188

P. 6

Navigation System Owner's Manual

P. 265


P. 155

P. 187

P. 190

P. 314/




3

The initial screen

If the power switch is set to “ACC” or

“IG-ON” mode, the initializing screen will be displayed for a few seconds as the system starts up.

185


■ To avoid damaging the touch screen

● Touch the screen lightly with your finger. If there is no response, remove your finger from the screen and try again.

● Remove any dirt on the screen by wiping with a soft cloth. Do not use detergent.

■ When using the touch screen

● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operating slightly slower than normal.

● The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses.

Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display” screen or remove your sunglasses.

186

3-1. Using the touch screen

Setting the touch screen

You can change the touch screen to your desired settings.

Language settings

The language used for all voice guidance, messages and touch screen switches may be changed.

STEP 1 Press .

STEP 2

STEP 3


Select the desired language.

3

STEP 4 Touch .

Turning off the beep sound

The beep that sounds when a touch screen button is touched can be turned off.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch .

187


Adjusting the display

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

Adjust the display as desired using / and / .

If you do not touch the screen for 20 seconds, the system will return to the previous screen.

Vehicles with CD player

Vehicles with DVD player

188

Color

Tone

Contrast

Brightness

/

Red

Lighter

Weaker

Darker

/

Green

Darker

Stronger

Brighter


■ “Day Mode”

When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims. However the screen can be switched to “Day Mode”.

The screen will stay in “Day Mode” when the headlights are turned on until touched again.

is

If the instrument panel light control is set to

“MAX”, “Day Mode” is not displayed.

■ To turn off the picture display

If is touched, the screen display is turned off, and guidance is by voice only.

3

189


Screen settings

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


The following screen settings can be changed.

Automatic transition

20 seconds after air-conditioning or audio system use, the system will return the display to the previous screen.

Switch color

You can select the switch color.

Delete personal data

The following personal data is deleted:

• User selection settings

• Phone book data

• Dialed numbers and received calls

• Speed dial

• Bluetooth ® phone data

• Security code

• Maintenance conditions*

• Maintenance information “off” setting*

• Memory points*

• Areas to avoid*

• Previous points*

• Route trace*

*: If the navigation system is equipped

190


■ Setting automatic transition

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

■ Setting the switch color

STEP 1

STEP 4

Press .

■ To delete personal data

STEP 1

Touch the

STEP 2

.

Touch .

Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once initialized.

3

■ When deleting personal data

Data can only be deleted when the vehicle is stopped.

■ When selling the vehicle

Be sure to initialize both the call history and personal data. (

 P. 190)

■ If you touch the

The display returns to the previous screen.

191

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system

Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Press to display the air conditioning operation screen.

Air conditioning operation screen display button

Airflow display Dual operation switch

Passenger’s side  temperature  display

Driver’s side  temperature display

Air conditioning 

ON/OFF switch

Fan speed display

Driver's side  temperature control

Passenger’s side  temperature control

Off

Outside air or recirculated mode

Automatic mode

Windshield defogger

Micro dust and pollen removal mode

The above illustration is for a vehicle equipped with the navigation system. The position of may differ slightly for vehicles not equipped with the navigation system.

192

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using the automatic mode

STEP 1

Press .

The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

STEP 2

Press to switch to automatic mode.

Automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.

STEP 3

Press  to increase the temperature and  to decrease the tem-

3 perature on the .

The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately.

Adjusting the settings

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

Press  to increase the temperature and  to decrease the temperature on the .

Press  (increase) or  (decrease) on the to separately adjust the temperature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Touch to return the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same setting

(simultaneous mode).

The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultaneous modes each time is touched.

193


■ Adjusting the fan speed

Touch any switch of operating screen.

Press to turn the fan off.

■ Changing the air outlets

(decrease  increase) on the

Touch any mode on the operating screen.

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

*: Only in the automatic mode

194


■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between and button is pressed.

(recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO”

(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the

When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically.

Defogging the windshield

Press .

The air conditioning system control operates automatically.

3

Micro dust and pollen filter

Press .

Outside air mode switches to

(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.

Usually the system will turn OFF automatically approximately 3 minutes later.

To stop the operation, press again.

195


Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press until the smog sensor screen appears while the vehicle is stopped.

Touch any switch of

(lower sensitivity  higher sensitivity) on the operating screen.

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Front outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down

Turn the knob to open or close the vent

196

Rear seat outlets


Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down

Turn the knob to open or close the vent

■ Using the automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.

● The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest temperature setting is selected in summer.

● Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow.

● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.

■ Using the system in recirculated air mode

The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period.

■ Window defogger feature

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to ations where the windows need to be defogged.

■ Outside temperature approaches 32  F (0  C).

The air conditioning system may not operate even when

(outside air) mode in situ-

is touched.

3

197


■ Automatic mode for air intake control

In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.

When the air conditioning is OFF, and the fan is operating, turning the “AUTO” mode ON will activate the air conditioning system.

■ Micro dust and pollen removal mode

● When the outside air is cold, the following may occur.

• Outside air mode does not switch to .

• The air conditioning system operates automatically.

• The operation cancels after 1 minute.

● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .

CAUTION

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE


Do not leave the automatic air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

198

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Press the button.

Press the button to turn on the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers. The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. Pressing the button again also turns the defoggers off.

3

■ Operating conditions

The power switch must be in the “IG-ON” mode.

CAUTION

■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

NOTICE


Turn the defoggers off when the hybrid system is off.

199

3-3. Using the audio system

Audio system type

CD and (optional) DVD player with changer, cassette player, and AM/FM radio 

This illustration below is for a vehicle not equipped with the DVD player.

Vehicles with navigation system

Vehicles without navigation system

The audio system appearance and screen may differ slightly for vehicles equipped with the DVD player.

200

3-3. Using the audio system

CD player: Plays audio CDs, CD text, MP3 discs and WMA discs.

DVD player: Plays audio CDs, CD text, video CDs, MP3 discs,

WMA discs, DVD video discs and DVD audio discs.

Title

Using the radio

Using the cassette player

Using the CD player

Playing MP3 and WMA discs

Using the DVD player

Playing DVD video/audio

Playing video CD

DVD player and DVD video disc information

Optimal use of the audio/video system

Using the steering wheel switches

Page

P. 203

P. 212

P. 216

P. 224

P. 232

P. 235

P. 247

P. 251

P. 255

P. 259

3

■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

201


CAUTION

■ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada

● Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning: 

Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device.

● Laser products

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself. 

This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

• This product utilizes a laser.



Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

NOTICE


Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the hybrid system off.

■ To avoid damaging the audio/video system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

202


Using the radio

Press or to choose either an AM or FM band.

When you press trol screen appears.

while listening to the radio, the following audio con-

Display audio control screen

Preset stations

Scan for 

receivable stations 

(AM mode only)

3

Power Volume

Seek frequency

Adjust the 

frequency 

(AM, FM mode) or  channel (SAT mode)

Preset tuning

Scan for receivable stations

AM  SAT/FM mode buttons

This illustration is a vehicle not equipped with the DVD player.

203


Setting station presets (excluding XM ® satellite radio)

STEP 1

Search for desired stations by turning the dial or pressing 

 or  on .

STEP 2 Touch and hold one of the preset stations (1 - 6) until you hear a beep.

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM ® satellite radio)

■ Scanning the preset radio stations

● AM station

STEP 1 Touch appears.

on the screen or press

Preset stations will be played for a few seconds each.

until “P  SCAN”

STEP 2

When the desired station is reached, touch once again.

● FM station

or press

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press until “P  SCAN” appears.

When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.

204


■ Scanning all radio stations within range

● AM station

STEP 1

Touch on the screen or press .

“SCAN” appears on the screen and all stations with reception will be played for a few seconds each.

STEP 2 When the desired station is reached, touch once again.

● FM station

or press

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

“SCAN” appears on the screen and all stations with reception will be played for a few seconds each.

When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.

3

RDS (Radio Data System)

This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this information.

■ Receiving RDS broadcasts

STEP 1

Touch screen.

or on the

205


The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.

● ROCK

● EASYLIS (Easy listening)

● CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

● R & B (Rhythm and Blues)

● INFORM (Information)

● RELIGION

● MISC (Miscellaneous)

● ALARM (Emergency messages)

If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.

When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.

STEP 2 Touch on the screen or press  or  on .

The radio seeks or scans the station by the relevant program type.

If no radio station of that type is found, “NOTHING” appears on the screen.

■ Displaying radio text messages

Touch on the screen.

If “MSG” appears on the screen, a text message may be displayed.

206


■ Traffic announcement


“TRAF SEEK” appears on the display, and the radio will start seeking any station broadcasting traffic program information.

If no traffic program station is found, “NOTHING” appears on the display.

XM ® satellite radio (if equipped)

■ Receiving XM ® satellite radio

STEP 1

Press on the screen.

until “SAT” appears

The display changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.

AM  SAT1  SAT2  SAT3

3

STEP 2

Turn the dial to select a desired channel from all the categories or press  or  on to select a desired channel in the current category.

■ Presetting XM ® satellite radio channels

Select the desired channel. Touch one of the preset stations (1 - 6) and hold it until you hear a beep.

■ Changing the channel category

Touch or on the screen.

207


■ Scanning XM

®

satellite radio channels

● Scanning channels in the current category

STEP 1

Touch on the screen or press

“SCAN” appears on the screen.

.

STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, touch the button once again.

● Scanning preset channels

or press

STEP 1

STEP 2

Touch on the screen or press you hear a beep.

“P  SCAN” appears on the screen.

and hold it until

When the desired channel is reached, touch the button once again.

or press

■ Displaying the title and artist name


The screen will display up to 16 characters.

Touch the button once again to return to the previous screen.

208



All preset stations are erased.

■ Reception sensitivity

● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.

■ XM ® satellite radio

The optional Lexus genuine satellite radio tuner and antenna allows you to receive and play XM ® satellite radio broadcasts. (Subscription is required. Not available in

Hawaii and Alaska.) *

● XM ® subscriptions 

For detailed information about XM ® satellite radio or to subscribe, visit XM ® on the web at www.xmradio.com or call (800) 967-2346.

● Radio ID 

You will need the radio ID when activating XM ® service or reporting a prob-

3 lem. Select “CH000” using the dial, and the receiver's 8-character ID number will appear.

● Satellite tuner 

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM

®

satellite radio.

* : Terms and services provided by XM notice.

®

Radio are subject to change without

209


■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally

If a problem occurs with the XM ® tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

ANTENNA

UPDATING

NO SIGNAL

LOADING

OFF AIR

-----

The XM

®

antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM

®

antenna cable is attached securely.

There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.

You have not subscribed to XM

®

satellite radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.

Contact XM

®

satellite radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose

“CH000” and all free-to-air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized.

Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact XM ® satellite radio.

The XM

®

signal is too weak at the current location.

Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

The unit is acquiring audio or program information.

Wait until the unit has received the information.

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed.

210


---

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

Contact the XM ® Listener Care Center at (800) 967-2346 during the following hours * .



Monday - Saturday: 6 a.m. - 2 a.m. Eastern Time 

Sunday: 8 a.m. - 8 p.m. Eastern Time

* : Subject to change without notice.

■ Certifications for the radio tuner

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:

● Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.

● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.

● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

3

211


Using the cassette player

Insert a cassette tape or press


Rewind

with a tape inserted.


while listening to the tape, the following audio con-

Fast forward

212

Change playback  direction

Repeat play

Skip play

Noise reduction

Power Volume

Playback

Change playback  direction

Track selection

Tape eject Tape slot

This illustration is a vehicle not equipped with the DVD player.


Selecting a track

■ Skip a number of tracks at a time

STEP 1

Press  on .

STEP 2

Press  until the number you want to skip appears.

9 tracks can be skipped at a time.

■ Rewind a number of tracks at a time

STEP 1 Press  on .

STEP 2

Press  until the number you want to rewind appears.

9 tracks can be rewound at a time.

Note that the number includes the current track.

3

213


Using Dolby ® Noise Reduction


Reduces the level of noise for tapes recorded with Dolby NR only.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

■ Canceling noise reduction, skip play, repeat play, rewind and fast forward

To cancel , and : Touch the corresponding button on the screen.

To cancel and : Touch the corresponding button on the screen or press

.

■ Auto-reverse feature

After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

■ When the cassette player does not operate correctly due to the cassette recording conditions

Forwarding to the beginning of a track, repeat, blank tape skip and fast-forward may not be possible in the following situations:

● The interval between tracks is less than 3 seconds (beginning of track and repeat playback) or less than 15 seconds (blank tape skip).

● When there is noise between 2 tracks.

● The beginning and end of subsequent tracks are not clearly defined.

■ Cleaning the cassette player

Cassette player components (heads, capstan, pinch rollers) should be cleaned at least once a month using a cleaning tape to remove dirt and dust that can easily build up.

■ Using long playing cassette tapes

Avoid using tapes with a length of more than 90 minutes, as the tape used is very thin and may become tangled in the cassette player.

214


NOTICE

■ Cassette tapes that cannot be used

Do not use a cassette tape if it has been damaged or tangled or if its label is peeling off. Such tapes may affect playing speed and may also get stuck in the player.

■ Cassette player precautions

● Store cassette tapes away from direct sunlight.

● Do not insert anything other than cassette tapes into the cassette player.

● Do not apply oil to the cassette player.

3

215


Using the CD player

Insert a CD or press

When you press screen appears.

with a CD inserted.

while listening to a CD, the following audio control

Display audio control screen Display track list

Repeat play

Select CD

Search playback

Random playback

Power Volume

CD slot

Select CD

Track selection CD eject CD load

Playback

This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.

216


Loading a CD

■ Loading a single CD

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert a CD after the CD/DVD player door opens.

■ Loading multiple CDs

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert a CD after the CD/DVD player door opens.

After inserting a CD, wait until the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, then insert the next CD after the CD/DVD door has opened.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have inserted all CDs.

To cancel the operation, press the or button. If you do not insert a CD within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.

3

Ejecting CDs

■ Ejecting a CD

STEP 1 To select the CD to be ejected, touch the desired disc number (1 -

6) on the screen or press  or  on .

STEP 2 Press

■ Ejecting all CDs

and remove the CD.

Press and hold until you hear a beep, then remove the CDs.

217


Selecting, fast forwarding and scanning tracks

■ Selecting a track

Press  to move up and  to move down using track number appears on the screen.

until the desired

To fast forward or rewind, press and hold  or  on .

■ Selecting a track from the track list

STEP 1 Touch on the screen.

STEP 2

Touch the desired track number.

or : changes the list by 6 track groups.

This function is available only when the vehicle is not moving.

■ Scanning a CD


“SCAN” appears on the screen.

STEP 2

The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.

Touch once again when the desired track is reached.

218


Selecting a CD

■ To select a CD to play

Touch the desired disc number (1 - 6) on the screen or press  or  on

.

■ To scan loaded CDs

STEP 1 Touch and hold on the screen until “D  SCAN” appears.

The first 10 seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.

STEP 2

Touch once again when the desired CD is reached.

Random playback

■ Current CD


Songs are played in random order until random playback is canceled.

■ All CDs

Touch and hold on the screen until “D  RAND” appears.

Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order until the button is touched once again.

3

Repeating a track or a disc

■ Repeating a track


■ Repeating a disc

Touch and hold on the screen until “D  RPT” appears.

219


■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback

Touch , , or on the screen once again.

■ Displaying the title and artist name

If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to

16 letters can be displayed.

■ Error messages

Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

Message Cause

Correction

Procedures

No CD or

No Disc

There is no disc in the CD or DVD changer

Insert a disc

CD X Check or

DISC X Check

CD Error or

DVD Error

NO MUSIC FILE

• The disc X is dirty or damaged

• The disc X is inserted upside down

• The disc X is not playable with the player

• There is a malfunction within the system

• Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player

This indicates that no playable data is included in the disc

• Clean the disc

• Insert the disc correctly

• Confirm the disc is playable with the player

• Eject the disc

• Eject the disc and allow the player to cool down

Eject the disc

220


■ CD compatibility

Audio CDs

Only audio CDs with the marks shown to the left can be used.

The following products may not be playable on your CD player.

● SACDs

● dts-CDs

● Copy-protected CDs

■ CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected.

■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

3

221


NOTICE

■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of discs, 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters or Dual Disc.



Doing so may damage the player and render the disc insert/eject function unusable.

● Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.

(12 cm).

● Low-quality and deformed discs.

● Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area.

● Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have the label peeled off.

222


NOTICE

■ Player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player itself.

● Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.

● Do not apply oil to the player.

● Store discs away from direct sunlight.

● Never try to disassemble any part of the player.

● Do not insert more than one disc at a time.

3

223


Playing MP3 and WMA discs

Insert an MP3 or WMA disc or press


with a disc inserted.

during playback of the disc, the following audio con-


Display folder list

Repeat play

Select folder

Search playback

Random playback

Power Volume

CD slot

Select file

Select CD

Select file

CD eject CD load

Playback

This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.

224


Loading, ejecting and selecting MP3 and WMA discs

Refer to the section titled “Using the CD player” for details. ( 

P. 216)

Selecting a folder

■ Selecting a folder

Touch “FOLDER ous/next folder.

” or “ ” on the screen to select the previ-

■ Selecting a folder from the folder list


STEP 2

Touch the desired folder number.

or : changes the list by 6 folder groups.

: displays the details of the file currently playing.

: displays the file list.


■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder

Touch and hold on the screen until “FLD  SCAN” appears. When the desired folder is reached, touch once again.

3

225


Selecting and scanning files

■ Selecting one file at a time

Turn the dial or press  or  on to select the desired file.

■ Selecting a file from the file list

STEP 1

Touch on the screen to turn the folder list on.

STEP 2

Touch screen.

on the folder list

226

STEP 3

Touch the desired file number.

or : changes the list by 6 groups.

: displays the folder list.

: displays the details of the file currently playing.


■ Selecting a desired file by cueing the files in the folder


When the desired file is reached, touch once again.


File repeat


Folder repeat

Touch and hold on the screen until the “FLD RPT” appears.

Random playback

■ To play files from a particular folder in random order


■ To play all the files on a disc in random order

Touch and hold on the screen until the “FLD RAND” appears.

■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback

Touch , or on the screen once again.

■ Error messages

 P. 220

■ CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.

■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

3

227


■ MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media TM Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used.

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards 

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies 

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) 

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates 

MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)

• MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)

*: Compatible with VBR

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

● WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards 

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies 

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates 

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps) 

Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)

* : Only compatible with 2-channel playback

● Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the

CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

228


● Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 level 1, level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) 

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

● File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

● Multi-sessions

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.

● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

3

229


● MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played.

● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

● Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

230


■ CD-R and CD-RW discs

● CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been subject to the “finalizing process” (a process that allows discs to be played on a conventional CD player) cannot be played.

● It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of the unit.

● It may not be possible to play discs recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and the environment. Record with the correct format. (For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the applications.)

● CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit may be unable to play damaged discs.

● If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/WMA player, playback will begin more slowly than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.

● Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played using the DDCD (Double

Density CD) system.

■ Unsuitable discs, and player precautions

 P. 222

3

231


Using the DVD player (if equipped)

Insert a disc or press with a disc inserted.



When you press during the playback of the disc, the following audio/ video control screen appears.

Display audio/video control screen

Select disc

Power Volume Disc slot

Select file

Change disc

Track, file and chapter  selection/fast forward/  rewind

Disc eject

Disc load

Playback

This illustration shows the audio system of a vehicle with the navigation system.

232


Loading a discs

■ Loading a single disc

STEP 1

STEP 2

Push .

When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert a disc after the DVD player door opens.

■ Loading multiple discs

STEP 1

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert a disc after the DVD player door opens.

After inserting a disc, wait until the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, then insert the next disc after the DVD player door has opened.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have inserted all discs.

To cancel the operation, press the or button. If you do not insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.

■ DVD hint screen

This screen appears when a DVD video, DVD audio or video CD is first selected with the power switch in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.

Touch once you have read the message.

3

233


Ejecting discs

■ Ejecting a disc

STEP 1

To select the disc to be ejected, touch the desired disc on the screen or press  or  on .

STEP 2 Press

■ Ejecting all discs

and remove the disc.

Press and hold until you hear a beep, then remove the discs.

Selecting a disc

■ To select a disc to play

Touch the desired disc on the screen or press  or  on .

● Audio CD, CD text

 P. 216

● MP3/WMA disc

 P. 224

● DVD video/audio

 P. 235

● Video CD

 P. 247

234


Playing DVD video/audio

For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the vehicle is completely stopped with the power switch in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode and the parking brake applied. While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.

■ Video control screen

Press while the disc is playing, the following screen appears.

Return to video screen

3

Change screen mode ( 

P. 258)

235


■ Control icon screen

Touch any part of the screen if no icons are shown while watching video, the following screen appears.

DVD video mode

Return to top menu screen

Page 1

Menu control key

Hide control icons

Go to page 2

Return to  menu screen

Rewind

Stop

Page 2

Fast forward

Playback

Pause

Initial DVD setup

Return to  page 1

Change angle

Search desired screen

Return to menu screen

Change subtitle language

Change audio language

If appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation relevant to that control is not permitted.

236


DVD audio mode

Return to top menu screen

Page 1

Menu control key

Hide control icons

Go to page 2

Change the  audio format

Rewind

Stop

Page 2

Fast forward

Playback

Pause

Initial DVD setup

Select menu number


Search  desired screen

Return to registered screen

Return to previous screen

Change angle

Change subtitle language

Go to next screen


3

Fast forwarding/rewinding disc

Touch and hold on

or

until you hear a beep.

on the screen or press and hold  or 

237


Slow playback

Touch are touching

and then touch

.

. Video is played slowly while you

Searching a desired screen

■ Searching by title (DVD video mode)

STEP 1 Touch in the control icons.

STEP 2

Input the desired title number and then touch .

: deletes the last input number.

: hides the icons. To display the icons, touch .

: returns to previous screen.

■ Searching by group (DVD audio mode)

STEP 1

Touch in the control icons.

STEP 2

Input the group number and then touch .


: hides the icons. To display the icons, touch .


238


■ Playing a bonus group (DVD audio mode only, if the DVD has bonus options)

STEP 1


STEP 2

Input the desired bonus group number on the group search screen and touch .

: deletes the number.


■ Searching by chapter/track

Press  or  on to select a chapter/track.

■ Selecting a menu number (DVD audio mode only)

STEP 1


STEP 2

Input the desired menu number on the screen and touch .

3

239


Using the DVD menu

STEP 1

STEP 2

Touch or in the control icons.



Touch menu screen.

if the menu control key does not appear on the or a menu item, then touch select.

to

: moves icons up or down.

: hides icons. To display icons, touch .


Note that specific items or the operating method differs from one DVD to another. Refer to the manual that comes with the DVD disc. (The above image is an example.)

Changing the subtitle language


Each time you touch the button, the next available language is selected.

: hides the control icons.


240


Changing the audio language (DVD video only)


Each time you touch the button, the next available language is selected.


Changing the audio format (DVD audio only)


Each time you touch the button, the next available audio format is selected.


3

Changing the angle (If the angle option is available)

STEP 1

Touch

STEP 2

in the control icons.

Touch the button.

Each time you touch the button, the next available angle is selected.


241


Initial DVD setup

■ Displaying “Setup Menu” screen

STEP 1


STEP 2

After you change the initial settings, touch .

: restores default settings.

242

■ Setting audio language

STEP 1 Touch .

STEP 2 Select the desired language.

If you cannot find the desired language, touch desired language code. (

 P. 243)


■ Setting subtitle language

STEP 1 Touch .



 P. 243)


■ Setting menu language

STEP 1 Touch .



 P. 243)


and input the

and input the

and input the


■ Setting angle mark ON or OFF

If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off.

Touch . Each time you touch the button, the multi angle mark on the screen turns on or off alternately.

■ Parental lock

STEP 1

Touch .

STEP 2

Input the 4-digit password and then touch .

If you enter wrong numbers, touch

to delete the numbers.

Touch 10 times to initialize the personal code.

3

STEP 3 Select a parental level (1 - 8).


■ Entering a language code

If you touch on the “Select Audio Language” screen, “Select

Subtitle Language” screen or “Select DVD Language” screen, you can select a language by entering the 4-digit language code if that language is available.

Input the 4-digit language code and then touch .

: deletes the last input digit.


243


● Language code

Code Language Code Language Code Language

1001 Japanese 0205 Byelorussian 0704 Scots-Gaelic

0514 English

0618 French

0207

0208

Bulgarian

Bihari

0712

0714

Galician

Guarani

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

0209

0214

0215

0218

Bislama

Bengali

Tibetan

Breton

0721

0801

0809

0818

Gujarati

Hausa

Hindi

Croatian

1412 Dutch 0301 Catalan

1620 Portuguese 0315 Corsican

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

0319

0325

Czech

Welsh

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0101 Afar 0515 Esperanto 0919 Icelandic

0102 Abkhazian 0520 Estonian 0923 Hebrew

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0118 Arabic 0609 Finnish

0119 Assamese 0610 Fiji

0125 Aymara 0615 Faroese

0126 Azerbaijani 0625 Frisian

0201 Bashkir 0701 Irish

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101

1111

Georgian

Kazakh

1112

1113

1114

Greenlandic

Cambodian

Kannada

244



1119 Kashmiri 1415 Norwegian 1914 Shona

1121

1125

Kurdish

Kirghiz

1503 Occitan

1513

(Afan) 

Oromo

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1201

1214

1215

1220

1222

1307

Latin

Lingala

Laothian

Lithuanian

Latvian

Malagasy

1518 Oriya

1601 Panjabi

1612

1619

1721

1813

Polish

Pashto, 

Pushto

Quechua

Rhaeto

Romance

1918

1919

1920

1921

1923

2001

Serbian

Siswati

Sesotho

Sundanese

Swahili

Tamil

1309 Maori

1311

1814

Macedonian 1815

Kirundi

Romanian

1312

1314

Malayalam

Mongolian

1823

1901 Sanskrit

2005

2007

Kinyarwanda 2008

2009

Telugu

Tajik

Thai

Tigrinya

1315 Moldavian 1904 Sindhi

1318 Marathi 1907 Sangho

1319

1320

Malay

Maltese

1908

Serbo

Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

1325

1401

1405

Burmese

Nauru

Nepali

1911

1912

1913

Slovak

Slovenian

Samoan

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

3

245



2023 Twi 2209 Vietnamese 2515 Yoruba

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2215

2315

Volapük

Wolof

2621 Zulu

2126 Uzbek 2408 Xhosa

■ Error messages

If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check the region code printed on the DVD matches the player's region code.

If a different message is displayed:

 P. 220

246


Playing video CD

For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the vehicle is completely stopped with the power switch in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode and the parking brake applied. While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.

■ Video control screen

Press while the disc is playing, the following screen appears.

Return to video screen

3

Change screen mode ( 

P. 258)

247


■ Control icon screen

Touch any part of the screen if no icons are shown while watching a video CD, the following screen appears.

Page 1

Search track

Hide control icons

Go to page 2

Return to  registered screen

Search previous page

Page 2

Change sound-multiplex

Search next menu


Pause

Rewind Playback

Fast forward


248


Fast forwarding/rewinding the video CD

Touch and hold

 or  on

or in the control icons or press and hold

until you hear a beep.

Slow playback

Touch and then touch played slowly while you are touching

in the control icons. Video is

.

Using the video CD menu


Refer to the manual that comes with the video CD for specific menu items.

3

249


Selecting a desired screen

■ Searching manually

Touch or on the screen, or press  or  on until the desired screen appears.

■ Searching by number

STEP 1


STEP 2

Input the desired track number on the screen and touch .


: hides icons. To display icons, touch .


Changing the sound-multiplex mode

Touch of the control icons. The mode cycles through each time the button is touched.

“Main”  “Sub”  “Main/Sub”

■ Error messages

If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check the region code printed on the DVD matches the player's region code.

If a different message is displayed:

 P. 220

250


DVD player and DVD video disc information

■ DVD video discs

The DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats.

Region code: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating the region in which you can use the DVD video disc. If the DVD video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this DVD player.

If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc on this player,

“Region Code Error” appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc does not have a region code, you may not be able to use it.

■ Symbols shown on DVD video discs

Mark Meaning

Indicates NTSC format.

3

Indicates the number of audio tracks.

Indicates the number of language subtitles.

Indicates the number of angles.

Indicates the screen display ratios available.

Wide screen: 16:9

Standard: 4:3

Indicates the disc’s region code.

ALL: in all countries

Number: region code

251


■ DVD compatibility

Audio CDs

DVD video discs

DVD audio discs

Video CDs

Use only discs marked as shown to the left.

The following products may not be playable on your DVD player.

● SACDs

● dts-CDs

● Copy-protected CDs

● DVD-Rs

●

●

●

●

●

DVD+Rs

DVD-RWs

DVD+RWs

DVD-ROMs

DVD-RAMs

■ DVD video disc information

● DVD video discs 

Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs have adopted

“MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoding technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.

252


● Viewer restrictions 

This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc.

Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.

Level 2-7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.

● Multi-angle option 

You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.

● Multi-language option 

You can select the subtitle and audio languages.

● Region codes 

The region codes are found on DVD players and DVD discs. If a DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on that DVD player. ( 

P. 251)

● Audio 

This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format

DVD. Other decoded types cannot be played.

● Title and chapter 

Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.

Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.

Chapter: A title is comprised of one or more chapters.

3

253


■ Sound

● Dolby Digital 

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.



“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.



©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.



This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.



Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

● DTS 

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater

System, Inc.

■ Unsuitable discs, and player precautions

 P. 222

CAUTION

■ DVD video precaution

Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source.

Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.

254


Optimal use of the audio/video system

Press on the panel to display the audio/video control screen.

Operating the radio, cassette player and CD player

Adjust sound  quality and balance

Adjust the DSP

Operating the DVD video/audio and video CD

3

Adjust sound  quality and balance

Adjust the DSP

Adjust screen ratio

255


Adjusting sound quality and balance

STEP 1


STEP 2

Adjust the settings, referring to the following table.

Once you have finished, touch

.

Sound quality mode

High-pitched tones*

Mid-pitched tones*

Low-pitched tones*

Display Level

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

Touch

or

Front/rear volume balance

F7 to R7

or

Left/right volume balance

L7 to R7 or

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio, cassette tape,

CD or DVD mode.

256


Setting DSP

The following features can be set as desired by touching on the screen.

With CD player With DVD player

■ Turning Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) ON or OFF

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise level as you drive your vehicle.

■ Changing the listening position (vehicles with CD player only)

The speaker balance can be changed to produce the best sound for each listening position.

Touch .

The listening position changes as follows each time the switch is touched.

Display Listening position

Position best suited to the driver's seat

3

Position best suited to the driver's and front passenger’s seat

257


Display Listening position

Position best suited to the rear seats

Position best suited to all seats

■ Turning the surround ON or OFF (with DVD player only)

Setting the screen ratio mode (with DVD player only)

STEP 1

STEP 2


Touch one of the ,

or to match screen ratio printed on the

DVD.

Screen ratio mode

NORMAL

WIDE1

WIDE2

Details

Suitable for 4:3 screen ratio

Expand the Normal screen  horizontally to fill the display.

Suitable for 16:9 screen ratio

258


Using the steering switches

Some audio features can be controlled using the steering switches.

Power on, select audio source

Volume

Radio: Select radio stations

Cassette: Fast forward, rewind and selecting tracks

CD: Select tracks, discs and folder

DVD: Select tracks, discs and chapter

3

Turning on the power

Press when the audio system is off.

The audio system can be turned OFF by holding the switch down for 1 second or more.

Changing the audio source

Press when the audio system is on. The audio source changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If a cassette tape or CD is not inserted, that mode will be skipped.

FM (1, 2)  cassette player  CD/DVD player  AM  SAT (1, 2, 3)

Adjusting the volume

Press “+” on ume.

to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the vol-

Hold down the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

259


Selecting a radio station

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press to select the radio mode.

Press  or  on to select a radio station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear a beep.

Fast forwarding or rewinding the cassette

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press to select the cassette mode.

Press and hold  or  on until you hear a beep.

To stop fast forwarding or rewinding, press the same switch.

Selecting a track or chapter (DVD mode only for chapter selection)

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press to select the cassette mode, CD or DVD mode.

Press  or  on to select the desired track or chapter.

Cassette mode only: you can skips maximum 9 tracks.

Selecting a disc or folder in the CD or DVD player (Folder selection is available only when MP3/WMA disc is in use.)

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press to select the CD or DVD player.

Press and hold  or  on until you hear a beep.

■ Canceling automatic selection of a radio station

Push the same switch.

CAUTION

■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

260

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Hands-free system

The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile phone without touching it.

This system supports Bluetooth

®

mobile phones. Bluetooth

®

is a wireless data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.

Telephone switch

Sending/Receiving/“Telephone” screen display (when stopped)

End call

3

Microphone

The person you are speaking to can be heard from the driver’s side speaker.

To use the hands-free system you must register your Bluetooth

® phone in the system. (

 P. 265)

261

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Status display

You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on the “Telephone” screen.

Connection status

Battery charge

Call area

Signal strength

Indicators

Connection status

Battery charge

Call area

Signal strength

Conditions

Blue: Good

Yellow: Bad

: Not connected

: Full

: Low

“Rm”: Roaming area

“Hm”: Home area

: Good

: Bad

: Not connected

262


■ When using the hands-free system

● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.

● If both parties speak at the same time it may be difficult to hear.

● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

● Try to face the microphone as much as possible when speaking.

● In the following circumstances it may be difficult to hear the other party.

• When driving on unsealed roads

• When driving at high speeds

• If the window is open

• If the air-conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone

• If the air-conditioning is set to high

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate

● If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth ® .

● If the mobile phone is switched off.

● If you are outside service range.

● If the mobile phone is not connected.

● If the mobile phone's battery is low.

■ Bluetooth ® antenna

The antenna is built into the display. If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.

■ Battery charge/Signal status

This display may not correspond exactly with the mobile phone itself.

■ About Bluetooth ®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of 

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

3

263


■ Compatible models

Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 and OPP (Object Push Profile)

Ver. 1.1.

■ Certification for the hands-free system

FCC ID: HYQBT0501A

IC ID: 1551A-BT0501A

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

■ FCC WARNING


Radio Frequency Exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regulations, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the antenna and the body of any person at all time during use.


Do not use the mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth ® system.

NOTICE

■ When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your mobile phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the phone.

264


Using the Bluetooth

®

phone

Telephone screen

Bluetooth ® Connection Status

Character Deletion

Display Last 

Person Called

Make A Call

3

To display the screen shown above, press , then touch on the

“Information” screen.

Registering a Bluetooth ® phone

You can register up to 6 phones in the system.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

265


STEP 4

Touch .

STEP 5

Touch .

STEP 6

Input the passkey displayed on screen into your phone.

If the message “Bluetooth* connection successful” is displayed, registration is complete.

If the message “Bluetooth* connection failed. Please check the

“Passkey” and the settings of the telephone” is displayed, start again from the beginning.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

266


Bluetooth ® phone connection

There are two connection methods available—automatic and manual.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3

STEP 4


Choose one of the following methods.

Automatic connection

If the power switch is in the “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode, the system will automatically connect to the 

Bluetooth ® phone. Touching automatic connection will turn it ON/

OFF.

Manual connection

If automatic connection fails or is turned OFF, connection must be made manually.

If the message “Bluetooth* connection successful” is displayed, connection is complete.

3


■ Reconnecting to the Bluetooth

®

phone

If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the power switch in the “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.



If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, connection must be made manually, or the phone must be re-selected.

267


Making a call

Once the Bluetooth

®

phone is registered, you can make a call using the following procedure.

■ Dialing

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

To delete the input phone number, touch Å£.

STEP 3


Inputting the phone number.

To delete the input phone number, touch .

To dial the last input phone number, touch .

STEP 4

Touch or press the on the steering wheel.

268


■ Dialing from the phone book

You can dial a number from the phone book data imported from your mobile phone. Up to 1000 entries may be stored in the phone book.

( 

P. 287)

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3

STEP 4


Choose the data to call from the list.

3

STEP 5

Choose the number and then touch or press the on the steering wheel.

269


■ Dialing from history

You can make a call from past dialed numbers or received calls.



Up to 5 numbers are stored, with the last recent number being deleted to make room for a new number.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3

STEP 4


Choose the number to call from the list.

To choose a number from the incoming calls history, touch

and choose a number to call.

STEP 5


270


■ Calling using speed dial

You can make a call using numbers registered from the phone book and call history. ( 

P. 279)

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3

STEP 4


Choose the desired number to make a call.

To change the page, touch

or .

3

271


■ Calling using voice recognition

Using voice recognition, you can call by name from the “Phone Book” screen, call by number from the “Telephone” screen, and send tones from the “Call” screen. (

 P. 276)

Talk switch

● Calling by name from the “Phone Book” screen

STEP 1

Press the talk switch.

272

STEP 2 Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say the desired name.



If there are multiple entries for the same name, “Next” will be displayed.



To select the next candidate, touch date”.

or say “Next candi-

STEP 3 Following the system guidance, press the talk switch.

STEP 4 Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say

“Dial”.


● Calling by number from the “Telephone” screen

STEP 1


STEP 2 Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say the desired number.

STEP 3

Following the system guidance, press the talk switch.

STEP 4

Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say

“Dial”.

● Sending tones from the “Call” screen

STEP 1


3

STEP 2 Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say the desired number.

STEP 3 Following the system guidance, press the talk switch.

STEP 4 Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say

“Yes”.

■ Calling using POI

You can make a call using a Point Of Interest. (  “Navigation System

Owner’s Manual”)

273


■ Made/Received call history list

● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phone book, the name is displayed in the call history.

● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the made calls history.

● is displayed to the left of phone number for unanswered calls.

● Calls where the number is unavailable, such as public telephones, are not stored in the call history.

■ When driving

● The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phone book”, and “Dialing from history” are unavailable.

● If you press the on the steering wheel, the “Speed Dial” screen is displayed.

At this time phone numbers will not be displayed. Choose from the names displayed to make a call.

■ International calls

You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile phone in use.

■ To display the voice recognition command list

STEP 1 After pressing the talk switch, press . If the “Operating

Guide” screen is displaying, press

.

STEP 2 Press .

274


■ To display the voice recognition operating guide

STEP 1 After pressing the talk switch, press . If the “Command

List” screen is displaying, press

.

STEP 2 Press .

■ To cancel voice recognition

● Press and hold the talk switch.

● Press on the steering wheel.

● Say “Cancel”.

● Press . (excluding command verification)

■ When using voice recognition

Use correct commands and speak clearly, otherwise the system may not correctly recognize the command. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to recognize the desired command.

3

Receiving a call

When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a sound.


275


■ To refuse a call

Touch and hold .

■ To adjust the received call volume

Press the or . You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches.

■ International calls

Received international calls may not be displayed correctly, depending on the mobile phone in use.

Speaking on the phone

The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.

276

■ To adjust the received call volume

Press the or . You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches.

■ To prevent the other party from hearing your voice

Touch .

■ Inputting a key

When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phone book.


STEP 1

Touch .

STEP 2

Input the number.

If repeated tone symbols* are stored in the phone book, and right side of the screen.

are displayed on the

*: Repeated tone symbols are symbols or numbers displayed as p or w, that come after the phone number. 

(e.g. 056133p0123w#1 ✽ )

STEP 3

Confirm the number displayed on screen, and touch

If you touch , operation is completed without making a call.

.

■ To transfer a call

Touch .

■ To hang up

3


■ Transferring calls

● It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the mobile phone while driving.

● If you transfer from the mobile phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.

● Transfer method and operation may vary according to the mobile phone used.

● For operation of the mobile phone in use, see the phone's manual.

■ To send a tone by speed tone

Touch list displayed.

then touch . Choose the desired number from the speed tone

■ While driving

Key input is unavailable.

277


Setting the hands-free system

You can speed dial, register in and edit the phone book, and set the 

Bluetooth ® phone.

Settings screen

Connection 

Method

To display the screen shown above, press , touch on the

“Information” screen, then touch on the “Telephone” screen.

278


Registering/Deleting a speed dial item

■ Registering a speed dial item

You can register a number from the phone book or the call history. Up to 17 entries may be stored.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3


STEP 4 Touch on the “Settings” screen.

STEP 5

Touch in the “Speed

Dial” section of the “Speed Dial

Settings” screen.

3

STEP 6

Select the data to be registered.

279


STEP 7

Select the number to be registered.

STEP 8

Press the desired switch.

The last dialed number will be registered in position 6.

■ Deleting a speed dial item

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3


STEP 4

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

STEP 5

Touch

Settings” screen.

in the “Speed Dial” section of the “Speed Dial

STEP 6

STEP 7

Select the data to be deleted.

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch .

280


■ To delete all speed dial items

Follow the steps for “Deleting a speed dial item” to “STEP 5”. In the “Speed Dial” section of the “Speed Dial Settings” screen, touch the message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch .

. A confirmation

Registering/Editing/Deleting a Speed Tone

■ Registering a speed tone

You can register up to 6 items.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3


STEP 4


STEP 5

Touch

Tone” section.

in the “Speed

3

STEP 6

Input the desired name and touch

.

, : Letter input

: Number/Symbol input

: Space

: Backspace

281


STEP 7

Input the number and touch

.

STEP 8

Touch the desired switch.

■ Editing a speed tone

STEP 1 Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3


STEP 4 Touch on the “Settings” screen.

STEP 5

Touch

Settings” screen.

in the “Speed Tone” section of the “Speed Dial

STEP 6

Touch the switch to be edited.

282


STEP 7

Input the name and touch

STEP 8

Input the number and touch

■ Deleting a speed tone

STEP 1

Press .

.

.


STEP 3


STEP 4


STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

Touch

Settings” screen.

in the “Speed Tone” section of the “Speed Dial

Choose the data to delete.


3

■ To delete all speed tone data

Follow the steps “Deleting a speed tone” to “STEP 5”. In the “Speed Tone” section, touch touch .

. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,

283




Setting the volume

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3


STEP 4


STEP 5

Touch or to lower or raise the volume.

Voice Volume:Change speaker volume the

Ring Volume:Change the ring volume

■ Adaptive Volume Control

When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or over, the system automatically raises the volume one level.



If the vehicle’s speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h), the volume will return to its original level.



You can turn this function ON/OFF by touching .

■ To return to the default volume settings

284


Changing the screen settings

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3


STEP 4


The following settings can be changed.

“Incoming Call Display”

The incoming call screen settings can be changed.

“Auto Answer”

When a call is received, the system automatically switches to the talking screen after the set period of time, meaning you can speak without pressing anything.

“Show Bluetooth* connection status at startup”

You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting.


3

285


■ “Incoming Call Display” settings

Select the desired switch.

: The hands-free screen is displayed when a call is received, and you can operate the system from that screen.

: A message is displayed at the top of the screen, and you can only operate the system with the steering switches.

■ “Auto Answer” settings

STEP 1

Touch tings” screen.

in the “Auto Answer” section of the “Screen Set-

STEP 6

Set the wait time using and . (1 - 60 seconds)

■ “Show Bluetooth* connection status at startup” settings

Touch / .


■ To set the screen settings to default

286


Phone book settings

Up to 1000 names, 2 items per name, can be registered.

■ Transferring mobile phone data

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3 Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 4


STEP 5

Touch .

3

STEP 6

Select the group to transfer to.

287


STEP 7

To overwrite data, touch

.

To add to existing data, touch

.

STEP 8

Transfer will begin. If you wish to cancel the transfer before finished, touch .

Transfer is complete when “Transfer completed” is displayed.

If “Transfer failed” is displayed, restart the process from the beginning.

■ Registering by input

STEP 1

Press .



STEP 4


STEP 5

Touch the

Book” section.

in the “Phone

288


STEP 6

Choose the switch to register.

STEP 7

Once input is complete, touch .

•

•

•

•

•

: Input the name on the

“Name” screen.

, : 

Input the number(s) on the “Telephone Number” screen. When you touch , the “Select

Icon” screen will appear.

Choose the desired icon.

3

: Select the desired group from the “Select Group” screen. (No Group, 01 -

09)

: Select the desired phone number and touch

to record a voice tag.



To play the voice tag, touch . touch .

To delete the voice tag,

289


■ Add history data to a registered entry

STEP 1

Press .


STEP 3

STEP 4


Choose the desired number from the list.

To choose from the received call history, touch desired number.

STEP 5

Touch .

then select the

STEP 6

STEP 7

Choose the phone book entry to be added to.

Check the data to be added, then touch .

290


■ Editing phone book data

STEP 1

Press .



STEP 4


STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

STEP 8

Touch in the “Phone Book” section of the “Phone Book

Management” screen.

Choose the data to edit.

Choose the switch to edit.

After editing, touch

■ Deleting phone book data

.

STEP 1

Press .


3


STEP 4


STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

Touch in the “Phone Book” section of the “Phone Book

Management” screen.

Select the data to delete.


291


■ To delete all data

Follow the steps “Deleting phone book data” to “STEP 5”. In the “Phone Book” section of the “Phone Book Management” screen, touch within a group, touch tact data, touch

.

. To delete all data

, then select the group to delete. To delete all con-

. Check that everything is correct, then touch

■ Registering/Editing/Deleting from the phone book

You can register data in the phone book, edit registered data, and delete items.

STEP 1 Press .



STEP 4 To register data, touch on the “Phone Book” screen.



To delete all data, touch .



To delete or edit specific data, select the data to delete/edit, then touch

to delete, or to edit.

■ The phone book

The method for transferring phone book data from the phone to the system varies with phone model. See the phone’s manual.

292


Changing the phone book group name settings

■ Registering a group name

STEP 1

Press .


STEP 3


STEP 4


STEP 5

STEP 6

Touch the switch in the “Group Name” section of the

“Phone Book Management” screen.

Select the group to register (“01” - “19”).

STEP 7

Select the switch to be edited.

: The below screen will be displayed. Select the desired icon.

: Input the name on the

“Name” screen.

3

STEP 8 Once editing is complete, touch .

293


■ Deleting a group name

STEP 1

Press .



STEP 4


STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

Touch in the “Group Name” section of the “Phone

Book Management” screen.

Select the group name to delete.



Follow the steps “Deleting phone book data” procedure to “STEP 5”. In the “Phone

Book” section of the “Phone Book Management” screen, touch mation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch .

. A confir-

294


Deleting the history

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3

STEP 4


Select the data to delete from the list.

To delete data from the received calls history, touch select the data to delete.

STEP 5

Touch .

, then

3

STEP 6 Check that everything is correct, then touch .


Follow the steps “Deleting a group name” to “STEP 4”. Touch going Calls” screen. To delete all received call history data, touch touch . Check that everything is correct, then touch .

on the “Out-

, then

Changing the security settings

You can disable certain hands-free system functions. Use the security settings when you do not wish other people to see the registered data, for example when having the vehicle valet parked at a hotel.

To enable or disable security, the security code (4 digits) is required. The default code is “0000”. Be sure to change the security code before use.

295


■ Changing the security code

STEP 1

Press .



STEP 4


STEP 5

Touch rity Code” section.

in the “Secu-

STEP 6

Input the current security code, and touch .

STEP 7

STEP 8

Input the new security code, and touch .

A confirmation message will appear. If everything is correct, touch .

296


■ Enabling security

STEP 1

Press .



STEP 4


STEP 5

STEP 6

Touch in the “Phone Book Lock” section of the “Phone

Book Lock” screen.

Input the security code, and touch

■ Setting the security code to default

.

STEP 1

Press .


3


STEP 4


STEP 5

Touch

STEP 6

on the “Phone Book Lock” screen.

Input the security code on the “Security Code” screen, then

STEP 7 touch .

A confirmation message will appear. If everything is correct, touch .

297


■ If the “Phone Book Lock” is set

If the security code is input and the “Phone Book Lock” set, the following functions are locked.

● Display of the phone book screen and transferring, registering, editing, deleting the phone book data.

● Display of speed dial screen, registering, deleting the speed dial and speed dialing.

● Display of the other party's name for calls being received or made.

● Displayed of dialed numbers screen and received calls screen, deleting dialed numbers and received numbers.

● Display of phone information screen.

● Changing the security code.

The speed dial screen is not displayed while driving.

■ When changing the security code

● Be sure to choose a number difficult for strangers to guess.

● Do not forget the security code. Even your Lexus dealer will be unable to disable the security. If you do forget the code, initialize all personal data. ( 

P. 190)

298


Setting a Bluetooth ® phone

■ Selecting a Bluetooth

®

If multiple Bluetooth

®

phone

phones are registered, follow the below procedure to select the Bluetooth

®

phone to be used. You may only use one phone at a time.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch .

3

STEP 5

Select the phone to be use, then touch .

If no phones are registered,

“Empty” will be displayed.

If “Bluetooth* connection successful” is displayed, registration was successful.

If another Bluetooth ® phone is already connected, a confirmation message is displayed. Touch

or .


299


■ Displaying Bluetooth

®

information

You can check the device address and device name.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2


STEP 3


STEP 4

STEP 5


On the “Select Telephone” screen, select the desired phone and touch .

STEP 6

To change the device name, touch

in the “Device Name” section, and input the name on the

“Name” screen (max. 20 characters).

■ To change the Bluetooth

®

settings

You can change the device name and passkey.

STEP 1 Press .



STEP 4


300


STEP 5

To change the device name, touch

in the “Device Name” section, and input the name on the

“Name” screen (max. 20 characters).

To change the passkey, touch

in the “Passkey” section, and input 4 - 8 digits on the “Passkey” screen.

■ Setting the Bluetooth

®

settings to default

STEP 1

Press .

3



STEP 4


STEP 5

STEP 6

Touch on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.

A confirmation message is displayed. If everything is correct, touch .


301


■ To delete the Bluetooth

®

settings

STEP 1

Press .



STEP 4


STEP 5

Touch in the “Bluetooth* Telephone” section of the 

“Bluetooth* Settings” screen.

STEP 6

On the “Delete Telephone” screen, select the phone to delete.

To check the device address, touch .

STEP 7

If you touch , a confirmation message is displayed. If everything is correct, touch .


302

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Illuminated entry system: The various lights automatically turn on/off according to the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are open/closed, and the power switch mode.

3

Outer foot light

Steering spot light

Front personal lights ( 

P. 305)

Shift lever light

Front interior lights ( 

P. 304)

303

3-5. Using the interior lights

Inside door handle lights

Rear personal lights ( 

P. 305)

Rear interior lights

Door courtesy lights

Foot light

Front scuff light

When the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum, the foot lights, inside door handle lights and shift lever light will turn off. ( 

P. 113)


If the interior lights, personal lights and steering spot light remain ON when the door is not fully closed or the interior light switch in “DOOR” position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

■ Customization

Setting (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (

 P. 510)

Interior lights

“ON”

“OFF”

“DOOR”

The interior lights are turned on/off by the illuminated entry system.

304

Personal lights

Front

3-5. Using the interior lights

ON/OFF

Rear

ON/OFF

3

■ Customization

Settings can be changed. (

 P. 513)

305

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features

306

Storage compartment

Glove box

Overhead console

Door pocket

Cup holders

Coin holder

Console box

Glove box

3-6. Using the storage features

Open (push button)

Lock with the mechanical key

Unlock with the mechanical key

■ Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the headlight switch is on.

■ Trunk opener main switch

The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. ( 

P. 30)

CAUTION


Keep the glove box closed.



Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Console box

Pull up the lever to release the lock.

Slide armrest.

Lift the armrest to open.

3

307


■ Console box light

The console box light turn on when the headlight switch is on.

CAUTION


Keep the console box closed.




Overhead console (if equipped)

The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items.

CAUTION

■ Items that should not be left in the overhead console

Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.



If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may warp or become cracked.


Do not leave the overhead console open. Items may fall out and cause injury.

308


Storage compartment

CAUTION


Do not leave the storage compartment open.

The opened compartment many hit your body or items may be thrown out of the compartment in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

3

Coin holder

Pull up lever to release the lock.

Slide armrest.

309


Cup holders

Front

To open, press down and release the cup holder lid.

Rear

To open, press in and release the rear cup holder on the armrest.

CAUTION

■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.



Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

■ When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed.




310

Door pockets


The door pocket can be opened and closed.

CAUTION


Keep the door pockets closed.




3

311

3-7. Other interior features

Sun visors

Forward position: Flip down.

Side position: Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.

Side extender: Place in side position, then slide backwards.

312


Vanity mirror

The light turns on when the cover is opened.

3

313


Clock

■ Adjust clock

With navigation system:  “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Without navigation system: Perform the following steps.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

Touch .

STEP 3

Adjust hours.

Adjust minutes.

Round the nearest hour.

Turn daylight saving time on.

Turn daylight saving time off.

After setting, touch .

■ The clock is displayed when

The power switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.


The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.

314


Outside temperature display

The displayed temperature ranges from -40°F (-40°C) up to 122°F

(50°C).

■ The outside temperature is displayed when


■ When --- is displayed

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

3

315


Ashtrays

Front

Slide the lid back to open.

Push the lever to remove the ashtray.

Push the lid to close.

Rear

Pull the ashtray lid to open.

Hold the plate down and pull the ashtray upwards to remove.

CAUTION

■ When not in use

Keep the ashtray closed.




NOTICE

■ To prevent fire

● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.

● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

316


Cigarette lighter

Slide the lid back to open, and push the cigarette lighter down.

The cigarette lighter will pop up when ready for use.

■ The cigarette lighter can be used when


CAUTION

■ To avoid burns or fires

● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.

● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.

● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.

3

317


Power outlet

The power outlet can be used for 12V accessories that run on less than

10A.

■ The power outlet can be used when


NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when not in use. 

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

■ To prevent the fuse from being blown

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12V/10A.


Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

318


Seat heaters (if equipped)

Heats the seats

The indicator light comes on.



The higher the number, the warmer the seats become.

■ The seat heaters can be used when


■ When not in use

Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.

CAUTION

■ Burns

● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.



Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

3

319

3-7. Other interior features

NOTICE

■ To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects

(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.


Turn the switches off when the hybrid system is off.

320


Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped)

The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats.

Heats the seats

The indicator light (red) comes on.



The higher the number, the warmer the seats become.

Blows air from the seats

The indicator light (green) comes on.



The higher the number, the stronger the airflow becomes.

3

■ The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when


■ When not in use

Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.

CAUTION

■ Burns

● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.



Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

321


NOTICE

■ To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects

(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.


Turn the switches off when the hybrid system is off.

322


Armrest

Pull the armrest down for use.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not place too much strain on the armrest.

3

323


Rear sunshade

The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by pressing the switch shown below.

Raise/lower

■ The rear sunshade can be used when


■ Reverse operation feature

To ensure adequate rear visibility, the sunshade automatically lowers when the shift lever is shifted to “R”.

However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:

● Shift the shift lever into “P”.

● The switch is pressed again.

● The shift lever is shifted out of “R”, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h).

If the hybrid system is turned off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the hybrid system is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the switch.

■ After the power switch is turned “OFF”

The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered for approximately 1 minute.

324


CAUTION

■ When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered

Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.



They may get caught, causing injury.

NOTICE


Do not operate the rear sunshade when the hybrid system is off.

■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshade


● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.

● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.

● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.

● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.

● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously over long periods of time.

3

325


Floor mats

Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.

Secure the floor mat using the hooks provided.

CAUTION

■ When inserting the floor mat

Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.

326


Trunk features

■ Cargo hooks

Cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.

■ Shopping bag hooks

3

■ First-aid kit storage belt

Loosen

Tighten

327


■ Luggage mat

Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up.

The lever can be hooked on the edge of the trunk.

CAUTION

■ When the cargo hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in use.

NOTICE

■ When closing the trunk

Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.



The luggage mat may get damaged.

328


Garage door opener

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, and other devices.

The garage door opener (HomeLink

 under license from HomeLink



.

Universal Transceiver) is manufactured

Programming the HomeLink  (for U.S.A. owners)

The HomeLink



compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device.

Indicator

Buttons

3

■ Programming the HomeLink



STEP 1

Point the remote control for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink



control buttons.

Keep the indicator light on the

HomeLink gramming.



in view while pro-

329


STEP 2

Press and hold down one of the buttons on the HomeLink



and the button on the transmitter.

When the indicator light on the

HomeLink



changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.

STEP 3

Test the operation of the

HomeLink



by pressing the newly programmed button.

STEP 4

If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the

Rolling Code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink



button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink



) flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the

Rolling Code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink



buttons.

330


■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)

If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink



” before proceeding with the steps listed below.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener.

Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button.

Press the training button.

Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink

 twice. The garage door may open.

button

If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink



transceiver and operate the garage door.

STEP 4 Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink



buttons.

■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink



.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink



in view while programming.

Press and hold the selected HomeLink



button.

Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.

When the indicator light on the HomeLink



compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.

3

331


STEP 5

STEP 6

Test the operation of the HomeLink



by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink



buttons.

■ Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.

■ Reprogramming a button

The individual HomeLink



buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Basic programming” instructions.

Operating the HomeLink



Press the appropriate HomeLink



button. The HomeLink



indicator light on the HomeLink



transceiver should turn on.

The HomeLink



continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Erasing the entire HomeLink



memory (all three programs)

Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the

HomeLink



memory.

332


■ Before programming

● Install a new battery in the transmitter.

● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink



.

■ Certification for the garage door opener

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC

Rules.



Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

3

CAUTION

■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink



Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.



This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

333


Compass

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.

■ Operation

To turn the compass on or off, push “AUTO” for longer than 3 seconds.

■ Displays and directions

Display

N

NE

E

SE

S

SW

W

NW

Direction

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

334

Calibrating the compass


The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.



To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.

■ Deviation calibration

STEP 1

Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.

STEP 2

Press “AUTO” until a number (1 to

15) appears on the compass display.

3

STEP 3 Press “AUTO”, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are.

335


STEP 4

Wait a few seconds until the compass direction is displayed.

The calibration is complete.

■ Circling calibration

If “CAL” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/ h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.

If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

● The vehicle has become magnetized.



(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

● The 12 volt battery has been disconnected.

● A door is open.

336


CAUTION


Do not adjust the display.



Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

■ When doing the circling calibration

Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

NOTICE

■ To avoid the compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. 

Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.

■ To ensure normal operation of the compass

● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

3

337


Lexus Link System (if equipped)

The Lexus Link System is a communication service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and cellular service to provide you with safety, security and convenience. This system is only operational in GPS and cellular coverage areas. Button operation and voice commands are used to operate the system. To operate the system, follow the voice guidance instructions. For details about service and subscription, call the Lexus Link

Call Center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free).

■ Buttons

Voice keypad button

Volume control

Phone button

“SERVICES” button

Emergency button

■ Services

The Lexus Link System offers the following services.

● Airbag deployment notification ( 

P. 340)

● Emergency assistance (

 P. 340)

● Stolen vehicle location assistance (

 P. 341)

● Remote horn/lights and remote door lock/unlock (

 P. 341)

● Advisor record (

 P. 342)

● Personal calling (

 P. 342)

● Other services ( 

P. 341)

Operating the Lexus Link System during a Bluetooth

 minate the Bluetooth



phone call.

phone call will ter-

338


Safety information for the Lexus Link System

Important! Read this information before using the Lexus Link System.

■ Exposure to radio frequency signals

The Lexus Link System installed in your vehicle is a low power ratio transmitter and receiver. When the power switch is in the “IG-ON” mode, it receives and also sends radio frequency (RF) signals.



In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies.

● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]

● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement)

Report 86 [1986]

● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, government health agencies, and industry reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard

(C95.1).



The design of the Lexus Link System complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.

3

339


Indicator and warning lights

Operation indicator light

If your subscription has expired, the operation indicator light will go off.

Warning light

If the warning light (red light) comes on, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Airbag deployment notification

If an airbag deploys, an emergency call is automatically placed to the Lexus

Link Call Center, and your vehicle’s location is identified. The Lexus Link

Advisor will attempt to contact you and assess the situation. The Advisor can quickly contact the nearest emergency services provider, describe the situation and request that assistance be sent to your location.

The Lexus Link Advisor can, if requested, connect you to an emergency services operator.

Emergency assistance

When you press the button, a priority call is placed to the Lexus Link

Call Center with your vehicle’s location. At the Call Center, the Lexus Link

Advisor can determine your vehicle’s location, communicate with you, and, if appropriate, contact the nearest emergency service provider.

If you have accidentally pressed the button, tell the Lexus Link Advisor that you are not experiencing an emergency.

340


Stolen vehicle location assistance

If your vehicle is stolen, call the Lexus Link Call Center at 1-800-25-

LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free) and select the option for Lexus Link.

To protect subscribers’ privacy, the location of a vehicle will not be provided to anyone other than a law enforcement authority.

Remote horn/lights and remote door lock/unlock

The remote operations are performed by contacting the Lexus Link Call

Center from the outside of the vehicle. When necessary, call the Lexus Link

Call Center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free) and select the option for Lexus Link.

● In the case that you forget to lock the vehicle or you are locked out, the

Lexus Link Call Center can send a signal to lock or unlock the vehicle remotely.

● In the case that you forget where you parked the vehicle, such as in a large parking lot, the Lexus Link Call Center can send a signal to flash the headlights and sound the horn to help you locate the vehicle.

When contacting the Lexus Link Call Center from the outside of the vehicle, you need the Lexus Link PIN (Personal Identification Number). Write the PIN down and carry it with you.

3

Other services

Press the button in the vehicle or call the Lexus Link Call Center at 1-

800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free), and then select the option for Lexus Link. The services provided will depend on the service plan level.

341


Advisor record

■ Recording a conversation with an advisor

Press the button to record a conversation. To stop recording, press the button again.

• Up to 2 minutes of recording time is available.

• Recording a new conversation deletes the previously recorded conversation.

■ Playing the recorded conversation

STEP 1

Press the or button.

STEP 2

Say “Advisor playback”.

Press the button again to stop the playback.

To restart the playback, press the button, say “Advisor playback” and then select either of the following methods.

• Say “Resume” to resume the playback.

• Say “Play” to start from the beginning.

Personal calling

The hands-free personal calling feature can be added to the Lexus Link

System as an option. You can purchase a package of minutes that works best for you. As you make and receive calls, minutes are deducted from your plan. They are easily billed to a credit card that is kept on file so no separate phone bill is needed.

Personal calling universal voice recognition commands:

• “Help” The system will provide a list of available commands.

• “Clear” When you are entering digits, this command will erase the last digit entered.

• “Cancel” This command takes you from the current function to the “Lexus

Link ready” prompt. If the last response from the system was “Lexus Link ready”, this command will exit voice mode.

342


Voice recognition error message:

• “Pardon” The system responds with this message if the system does not recognize your voice command properly. Say the command slowly again.

After the third time this happens, the system will try to guess the command you are requesting. If correct, say “Yes”. If not, say “No”, and the system will prompt you with its next-best guess.

• “Slower please” The system responds with this message if you say a command before the system is ready to listen or if your voice command cannot be recognized because of substantial background noise. Try to wait slightly longer before speaking.

■ There are 5 ways to make a call.

Dialing a specific number

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

Link ready”, say “Dial”.

When the system responds with “Phone number to dial please”, say the entire number you wish to dial without pausing.

STEP 3

STEP 4

The system will repeat the number and ask “Yes or No”.

Say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).

STEP 5 The system responds with “Dialing” (your call will then be connected).

Dialing digit-by-digit (“Digit Dial”)

“Digit Dial” enables you to dial a phone number by individual digit. This is helpful when there is background noise and also improves voice recognition.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3


Link ready”, say “Digit dial”.

When the system responds with “Digit please”, say the first digit of the number to be dialed and wait for it to be repeated back to you.

Continue one digit at a time until all digits are entered.

3

343


STEP 4

When finished, say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dialing” and your call is placed.

If you have problems storing a number using the continuous number method, you can store numbers one digit at a time using “Digit Store”.

Simply follow the instructions above for “Digit Dial”, except say “Digit

Store” in STEP 1 and “Store” in STEP 4.

Dialing a phone number saved as a nametag

A nametag is a convenient way to store important or frequently called phone numbers for easy access at any time. To do this, choose a frequently-called number to store, the example below uses your home telephone number.

● How to store a nametag

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6


Link ready”, say “Store”.

When the system responds with “Phone number to store, please”, say the entire number you wish to store with no pauses. The system will repeat the number and ask “Yes or No”.

Say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).

When the system responds with “Nametag, please”, say “home”.

When the system responds with “About to store home. Does that sound OK?”, say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).

The system responds with “Storing home”.

-The system can store up to 20 nametags.

-Try to use multi-syllable nametags such as “my home”, and “the office”.

-Try to avoid similar-sounding nametags like “Tim” and “Kim”.

When using the “Dial” and “Store” commands, the system will recognize 7, 10, and 11-digit phone numbers. When dialing or storing a phone number, you can say “zero” or “oh” for 0.

344


● How to place a call using a stored nametag

STEP 1

STEP 2


Link ready”, say “Call”.

When the system responds with “Nametag, please”, say the stored nametag.

STEP 3

The system responds with “Calling [nametag]”.

● How to hear a list of your stored nametags

STEP 1


Link ready”, say “Directory”.

STEP 2

The system will list your nametags.

Dialing the last number you called (“Redial”)

You can dial the last number you called by using the “Redial” feature.

STEP 1


Link ready”, say “Redial”.

STEP 2

The system will respond with “Redialing [#]”.

Dialing a number a Lexus Link Advisor downloaded to your vehicle

STEP 1

STEP 2


Link ready”, say “Number recall”.

The system will respond with “Connecting to number recall”.

■ Receiving a call

When someone calls you, you will hear a ring tone. Press the ton to answer the call.

but-

If you do not answer within 30 seconds, the system will terminate the incoming call.

■ Ending a call

When your call is finished, press the button to end the call.

3

345


■ Accessing voicemail and sending number tones to an automated phone system

You can access a voicemail system and respond to a number request from an automated phone system. When you receive the request for a number while in a call, press the one at a time, say “Dial”.

button after saying the numbers

If you do not say any commands within 5 seconds after pressing the button, or if you press the button twice, the system cannot receive the number tones you are trying to send. Press the button to try again.

■ How to retrieve your phone number

STEP 1 Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

Link ready”, say “My number”.

STEP 2 The system responds with “Your number is [#]”.

If the response is “Personal calling unavailable”, this means your personal calling feature is not yet active, this may take a few days from vehicle delivery. It could also mean that the personal calling service is not available in your area. Press the button to check with an Advisor. Now that you have your number, take a moment to practice by making your first call to your home phone. Remember, the system recognizes numbers better when you say them quickly.

346


■ Verifying remaining units (minutes)

To verify remaining minutes

STEP 1


Link ready”, say “Units”.

STEP 2

When the system responds with “Verify or add”, say “Verify”.

STEP 3

The system responds with “You have [#] units remaining”.

To add more calling units (minutes)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3


Link ready”, say “Units”.

When the system responds with “Verify or add”, say “Add”.

The system responds with “Connecting to the Personal Calling

Center”.

■ Security code/locking your system

The personal calling function can be locked using a 4-digit security code.

While the system is locked, it is only possible to communicate with the

Lexus Link Call Center.

To turn on/off the security

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3


Link ready”, say “Security”.

When the system responds with “Enter first digit of code please”, say your 4-digit code one digit at a time.

After the fourth digit, the system responds with “Security (code

####) is now on/off”.

3

347


■ Speech recognition information

The Lexus Link speech recognition systems use speech technology that is designed to understand a wide range of speakers of American English. However, the technology may not work as well if a regional or ethnic accent is encountered. If the speech recognition system does not work properly, refer to the following.

● The system does not recognize your command properly if noise is present. Perform the following to improve voice command recognition.

• Turn down or off the air conditioning system.

• Slow down to reduce wind noise.

• Close the windows and the moon roof to block outside noise.

• Have all occupants be quiet so that the system does not recognize their conversation as a command.

● When to speak 

Say a command within 5 seconds after the system prompts you to speak.

● How to speak

• Speak forcefully and clearly.

• Speak calmly and naturally.

• The driver should speak while facing forward, and the passenger should speak facing the inside rear view mirror.

• Avoid speaking with a rising intonation. Use a flat or falling intonation.

● Tips for one-word commands

• The system recognizes only one word at a time for personal calling. (There are some exceptions, such as “Advanced services” and “My number”.)

• When inputting the security codes or voice-activated keypad number, you must say them one digit at a time. When inputting a phone number, the speech recognition system can recognize 7, 10, and 11-digit numbers as well as the number 911.

348


● Tips for entering a phone number using the “Dial” and “Store” commands

• You do not need to say “Dial”, “Store” or “Verify” after the phone number.

• If the phone number entered is not 7, 10, or 11 digits, use the “Dial” or “Store” command.

• Do not pause between the digits.

• Speech recognition does not recognize the words “Hundred” or “Thousand”.

Instead, say each digit.

• Speech recognition often works better when the digits are combined smoothly into a single phrase.

• If the system does not recognize your command properly, use the “Digit dial” command to enter one digit at a time.

● If problems continue

• Say each one of the syllables in the word clearly.

• Be sure to articulate each sound in the word.

• If the system is confusing 2 commands that are similar, be sure to pronounce the distinction.

• Avoid clipping short words and syllables.

• Try speaking louder to prevent background noise from drowning out your voice.

● Audible voice prompts

Some of the voice guidance instructions can be changed to Spanish. Press the

button and ask a Lexus Link Advisor.

■ Information on Advanced Services

See the Lexus Link area of the Lexus website at www.lexus.com/lexuslink/ or call the Lexus Link Call Center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free) for more information.

■ Certification for the Lexus Link System

3

FCC ID: SCWTR-423-A2

NOTE: 

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

349


CAUTION

■ FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 

Radio Frequency Exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regulations, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the antenna and the body of any person at all time during use.

350

Maintenance and care

4

4-1. Maintenance and care........ 352

Cleaning and protecting the  vehicle exterior........................ 352

Cleaning and protecting the  vehicle interior......................... 354

4-2. Maintenance........................... 357

Maintenance  requirements............................ 357

General maintenance............. 359

Emission inspection and  maintenance (I/M)  programs................................... 362

4-3. Do-it-yourself  maintenance......................... 363

Do-it-yourself service  precautions............................... 363

Hood .............................................. 366

Positioning the jack .................. 367

Engine compartment .............. 369

Tires................................................. 383

Tire inflation pressure .............. 393

Wheels .......................................... 397

Air conditioning filter .............. 399

Electronic key battery.............. 401

Checking and replacing  fuses............................................. 403

Headlight aim .............................. 419

Light bulbs...................................... 421

351

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.

● Wipe away any water.

● If water no longer beads on clean paint, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes

● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.

● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.

■ High pressure automatic car washes

Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. Before entering an automatic car wash, check that the fuel filler door is closed.

■ Aluminum wheels

Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

■ Bumpers and side moldings

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

352

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body

● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface

• If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

CAUTION

■ Caution about the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.



When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

4

NOTICE

■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces

Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. 

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

353

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:

■ Protecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

■ Cleaning the leather areas

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in shaded and ventilated area.

■ Synthetic leather areas

● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth.

● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

354


■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window

Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.

■ Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

4

CAUTION

■ Water in the vehicle

● Be careful not to splash or spill liquid on the floor.

● Do not splash water on the electric components in the engine compartment. This may cause the malfunction of the electric components.

● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. 

( 

P. 67)



Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

355


NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.

● Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, or bleach.

● Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.

■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces.

● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.



Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust.

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window

Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

356

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.

■ General maintenance

Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.

■ Scheduled maintenance

Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled

Maintenance”.

■ Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself. 

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Lexus service and repair manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,

“Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or

“Warranty Booklet”.

4

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

357

4-2. Maintenance

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer

● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.

CAUTION

■ Hazardous materials

● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (

 P. 379)

● Used engine oil contains chemicals that have been shown to cause cancer in laboratory animals. Avoid prolonged and repeated contact. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

358


General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s

Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Items

Brake fluid

Engine/inverter coolant

Engine oil

Exhaust system

Radiator/condenser/hoses

Washer fluid

Luggage compartment

12 volt battery

Items

Check points

• At the correct level? ( 

P. 378)

• At the correct level?

( 

P. 376)


(

 P. 371)

• No fumes or strange sounds?

• Not blocked with foreign matter? 

( 

P. 377)


(

 P. 382)

4

Check points

• Maintenance-free (

 P. 379)

359

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle interior

Items

Accelerator pedal

Transmission “Park”  mechanism

Brake pedal

Brakes

Head restraints

Indicators/buzzers

Lights

Parking brake

Seat belts

Seats

Steering wheel

Check points

• Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)?

• Can the vehicle be hold securely on an incline with the shift lever in “P”?

• Moves smoothly?

• Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play?

• Pulls to one side when applied?

• Loss of brake effectiveness?

• Spongy feeling brake pedal?

• Pedal almost touches floor?

• Move smoothly and lock securely?

• Function properly?

• Do all the lights come on?

• Headlights aimed correctly? (

 P. 419)

• Moves smoothly?

• Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline?

• Does the seat belt system operate smoothly?

• Are the belts undamaged?

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

• Moves smoothly?

• Has correct free play?

• No strange noises?

360

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior

Doors/trunk

Engine hood

Fluid leaks

Items

Tire

Check points

• Operate smoothly?

• The lock system works properly?

• Is there any leakage after parking?

• Inflation pressure is correct?

• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?

• Tires rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

• Wheel nuts are not loose?

CAUTION

■ If the hybrid system is running

Turn off the hybrid system and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

4

361


Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include

OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.

■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:

● When the 12 volt battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.



Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

● When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

362

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in these sections.

12 volt battery condition (

Brake fluid level

Items



Engine/inverter coolant level

(





P. 379

P. 376)

)

( 

P. 378)

Parts and tools

• Grease

• Conventional wrench 

(for terminal clamp bolts)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE

J1703 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

For the U.S.A.: 

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and

50% deionized water.

For Canada: 

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and

45% deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

4

363

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil level

Items

(

 P. 371)

Parts and tools

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses (

 P. 403)

• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

Headlight aim (

 P. 419) • Phillips-head screwdriver

Radiator and condenser (

 P. 377)



Tire inflation pressure ( 

P. 393)

Washer fluid (

 P. 382)

• Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source

• Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel

CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury.

■ When working on the engine compartment:

● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

● Be careful not to touch the engine, inverter, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

364


CAUTION

■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille

Be sure the power switch is “OFF”.



With the power switch in “IG-ON” mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. 

( 

P. 377)

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes.

NOTICE

■ If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

4

365


Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

STEP 1

Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

STEP 2

Lift the hood catch and lift the hood.

CAUTION

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. 

If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

366


Positioning the jack

When raising your vehicle with the jack, position the jack correctly.

Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Front

Rear

4

367


CAUTION

■ When raising your vehicle

Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury.

● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by the jack.



Always use automotive jack stands or a solid, level, surface.

● Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the jack.

● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift lever in “P”.

● Make sure to set the jack properly at the jack point.



Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.

● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack.

368


Engine compartment

Engine oil level dipstick 

(

 P. 371)

Engine oil filler cap

( 

P. 372)



Brake fluid reservoir 

(

 P. 378)

Fuse box ( 

P. 403)

Washer fluid tank 

( 

P. 382)

Gasoline engine/inverter  coolant reservoir (

 P. 376)

Electric cooling fans

Condenser (

 P. 377)

Radiator (

 P. 377)

4

■ 12 volt battery

 P. 379

369


Engine compartment cover

■ Removing the cover

Front

Right-hand side

Left-hand side

370

■ Installing the clips


Push up center portion

Insert

Press

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the hybrid system, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

STEP 2

Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.

4

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

371


STEP 6

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

Low

Full

372

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Oil grade

Oil quantity

(Low  Full)

Items

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)

Clean funnel

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Remove the oil filler cap.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise until you hear a click.


■ Recommended viscosity

SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather.

Outside temperature

*: If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available,

SAE 10W-30 oil may be used.

However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change.

■ How to read oil container labels

Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that help you to select the proper oil.

4

373


■ Engine oil consumption

● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.

● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.

● A new engine consumes more oil.

● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.

● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000 km). If the vehicle consumes more than this amount, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Resetting the engine oil maintenance data (U.S.A. only)

Perform the following steps:

STEP 1 Press the “DISP” switch ( 

P. 120) to change the multi-information dis-

play to blank.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Turn the power switch to “OFF” mode.

Turn the power switch to “IG-ON” mode with the trip meter reset button held down.

Keep pressing the button for longer than 7 seconds after the power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

After the above operation, the message shown in the left will appear on the display.

The master warning light and tone will turn on. After 5 seconds, the system reset is completed.

374


CAUTION

■ Used engine oil

● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.



Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on regular basis.

■ When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly retightened.

4

375


Coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.

Reservoir cap

“FULL”

“LOW”

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to the

“FULL” line.

■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump. 

If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31  F [-35  C])

Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44  F [-42  C])

For more details about engine/inverter coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.

376


CAUTION

■ When the coolant may be hot

Do not remove the radiator cap.



The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.

NOTICE

■ When adding the coolant

Coolant is neither plain water not straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and anti freeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it damage to parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects. 

If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

4

CAUTION

■ The radiator and condenser may be hot after driving

To prevent burns, do not touch the radiator or condenser after driving.

377


Brake fluid

■ Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

■ Adding fluid

Fluid type

Items

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

CAUTION

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.



If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

378


NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.



If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

12 volt battery

■ Location

The 12 volt battery is located in the left-hand side of luggage compartment.

■ Exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

4

379


■ Before recharging

When recharging, the 12 volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:

● If recharging with the 12 volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12 volt battery

In some cases, the hybrid system may not start. Follow one or both of the following procedures:

● After opening and closing the driver's door, wait 10 seconds then attempt to start the hybrid system. (If the system does not start first time, repeat the procedure.)

● With the shift lever in “P” and the power switch in the “OFF” mode, open and close any door, then attempt to start the hybrid system.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at both methods, contact your Lexus dealer.

380


CAUTION

■ Chemicals in the 12 volt battery

A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:

● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

● Keep children away from the battery.

■ Where to safety charge the 12 volt battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

■ How to recharge the 12 volt battery

Only perform a slow charge (5A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes 

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin 

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, seek medical attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes 

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte 

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

4

381


NOTICE

■ When recharging the 12 volt battery

Never recharge the battery while the hybrid system is on. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Washer fluid

If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.



Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. 

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.

382


Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedule and treadwear.

■ Checking tires

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or

“ ” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.

Check spare tire condition and inflation pressure if not rotated.

■ Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

Front

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

4

■ The tire pressure warning system

Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. ( 

P. 440, 445)

383


Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID code registered by your Lexus dealer. ( 

P. 386)

Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:

● When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.

● When changing the tire size.

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.

384


■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

STEP 1

Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the power switch to “OFF” mode.

While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.

STEP 2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. ( 

P. 493)

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

STEP 3

Turn the power switch to “IG-ON” mode.

STEP 4

Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly three times and the message “PRESSURE INITIAL” appears on the multi-information

4 display.

STEP 5

Wait for a few minutes with the “IG-ON” mode, and then turn power switch to the “OFF” mode.

385


Registering and selecting ID codes

■ Registering ID codes

2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2nd”, you can switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure warning select switch.

There are 2 settings:

“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.

“2nd” position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your

Lexus dealer.

■ Selecting ID codes

When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches the new tire set. If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to wrong tire setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate properly. After about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.

“MAIN”

“2nd”

386


■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.

■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.

■ Low profile tires (245/40R18, P245/40R18 and 245/40ZR18 tires)

Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or snow chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.

4

387


■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross

Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.



As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight

Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. ( 

P. 393, 498).

■ Tire types

1 Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2 All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

3 Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.

If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.

Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. ( 

P. 176)

■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system

Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.

388


■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the system again.

■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not flash 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the multi-information display.

● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute after driving for 20 minutes.

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

4

389


■ Tire pressure warning system certification


NOTE: 


NOTICE: 

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING: 



NOTE: 


390


CAUTION

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.

● Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.

● Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires.

● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tire.

4

391


NOTICE

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.



These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

■ Low profile tires (245/40R18, P245/40R18 and 245/40ZR18 tires)

Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following:

● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.

● Avoid hot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.

■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

392


Tire inflation pressure

■ Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (

 P. 493)

4

393


■ Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.

If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust tire pressure.



If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Reinstall the tire valve cap.

.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every 2 weeks, or at least once a month.



If equipped, do not forget to check the spare.

394


■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

● Reduced fuel efficiency

● Reduced driving comfort and tire life

● Reduced safety

● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

● Check only when the tires are cold.



If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.



The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.

● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.



Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

4

395


CAUTION

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.

● Excessive wear

● Uneven wear

● Poor handling

● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

● Poor sealing of the tire bead

● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.



Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible.

396


Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. 

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.

■ Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.



Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.

Lexus does not recommend using:

• Wheels of different sizes or types

• Used wheels

• Bent wheels that have been straightened

• Lexus wheels with after market chrome plating

■ Aluminum wheel precautions

● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

4

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be switched over from the old wheels. (

 P. 384)

397


CAUTION

■ When replacing wheels

● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.

Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.



Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.

398


Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

■ Removal method

STEP 1 Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode.

The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in the outside air mode.

STEP 2

STEP 3


Open the glove box and remove the partition.

STEP 4

Remove the filter cover.

4

STEP 5

Push the tabs and remove the filter case.

399


■ Cleaning method

■ Replacement method

If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the filter from the downward side.

Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from the filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes at 72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm

2

or bar).



If it is not available, have the filter cleaned by your Lexus dealer.

Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one.

The “  UP” marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up.

■ Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)

■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the system

● When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.

● When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.

400


Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.

■ You will need the following items:

● Flathead screwdriver

● Small Phillips-head screwdriver

● Lithium battery (CR1632)

■ Replacing the battery

STEP 1

Take out the mechanical key.

STEP 2

Remove the cover.

4

STEP 3

Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

401


■ If the electronic key battery is discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly.

● The operational range is reduced.

■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery

● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.

● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

CAUTION

■ Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children. 

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

● Always work with dry hands.



Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other components inside the electronic key.

● Do not bend the battery terminals.

402


Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.

If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

STEP 1

STEP 2


Remove the engine compartment cover if necessary.



P. 370

STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment

Remove the clips.

Front controller in the engine compartment fuse box

Lift the lid off while pushing the tabs on either side.

4

403


Driver's side instrument panel

Remove the lid.

Passenger's side instrument panel

Remove the lid.

Luggage compartment

Remove the cover.

404


Luggage compartment (vehicles with active stabilizer suspension system)

Remove the lid.

STEP 4

STEP 5

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”

( 

P. 408) for details about which fuse to check.

Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

4

405


STEP 6

Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type B

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact your Lexus dealer.

406

Type D


Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact your Lexus dealer.

4

407


Fuse layout and amperage ratings

■ Engine compartment

408

1

2

Fuse

FR CTRL-B

RELIEF VLV

3 ETCS

6

7

4

5

H-LP CLN

STB-AM

DEICER

FR CTRL-AM

Ampere

25

10

10

30

30

25

30

Circuit

H-LP HI, HORN

Fuel system

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

Headlight cleaner

Active stabilizer suspension system

FR TAIL, FR FOG, WASH


8

12

13

14

9

10

11

15

IG2

Fuse

EFI No.2

H-LP R LWR

H-LP L LWR

D/C CUT

IGCT No.3

IGCT No.2

MPX-B

16 DOME

17 ABS MAIN1

18 ABS MOTOR

19 ABS MAIN2

20 F/PMP

21 EFI

22 INJ

30

7.5

7.5

10

15

15

10

30

10

25

Ampere

10

7.5

7.5

25

20

Circuit

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, noise filter

Fuel system, exhaust system

Headlight low beam (right)

Headlight low beam (left)

DOME, MPX-B

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Hybrid system

Power windows, door control system, power seat, electronically controlled brake system, combination switch, electric tilt and telescopic steering, gauges and meters

Interior lights, foot lights, vanity light, gauges and meters

Electronically controlled brake system

ABS


Fuel system

EFI2, multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

409

4


23

24

A/F

Fuse

INV W/P

25 IGCT No.1

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

FR FOG

FR TAIL

WASH

HORN

H-LP HI

DC/DC

RAD FAN

33 LH J/B AM

34 E/G AM

35

36

37

HEATER

DEFOG

ABS2

38 RH J/B-AM

Ampere

15

10

20

10

20

140

60

15

10

20

80

60

50

50

30

80

Circuit

Fuel system

Hybrid system

Hybrid system, IGCT No.2, 

IGCT No.3

Fog light

Tail light, rear side marker light

Windshield washer

Horn

Headlight high beam

Charging system


S/ROOF, FR P/SEAT LH, TV, A/C,

FUEL OPN, FR WIP, H-LP LVL, 

FR S/HTR LH, A/C W/P

H-LP CLN, FR CTRL-AM, DEICER,

STB AM

Air conditioning system

Rear window defogger

VSC, ABS

AM1, OBD, STOP SW, TI & TE, 

FR P/SEAT RH, STR LOCK, 

SECURITY, ECU-IG R, RH-IG, 

F S/HTR RH, CIG, PWR OUTLET, 

AIR SUS

410


Fuse

39 RR J/B

40

41

42

43

44

45

OIL PUMP

EPS

P/I-B1

E/G-B

MAIN

VGRS

46 ABS1

47

48

49

50

51

P/I-B2

BATT FAN

RAD No.1

RAD No.2

IG2 MAIN

52 TURN-HAZ

53 ABS MAIN3

54 ECU-B

Ampere

80

60

80

60

30

30

40

50

60

20

30

30

20

15

10

10

Circuit

STOP LP R, STOP LP L, RR TAIL,

PSB, RR FOG, RR-IG1

Transmission

EPS

EFI, F/PMP, INJ

EM-VLV, FR CTRL-B, ETCS

H-LP R LWR, H-LP L LWR

VGRS

ABS MOTOR, ABS MAIN1, 

ABS MAIN2

A/F, BATT FAN, IGCT, INV W/P


Audio system

Audio system

IG2, GAUGE, IGN

Front turn signal lights, rear turn  signal lights


VGRS, EPS, Lexus Link System ECU

4

411


■ Driver’s side instrument panel

412

1

2

3

Fuse

FR WIP

RR-IG

LH-IG

6

7

4

5

8

H-LP LVL

A/C W/P

RAD No.3

FR DOOR LH

RR DOOR LH

9 FR S/HTR LH

10 ECU-IG LH

7.5

7.5

10

20

20

15

Ampere

30

7.5

10

10

Circuit

Windshield wipers

RR-IG1

Emergency flashers, seat belt pretensioners, headlight cleaners, exhaust system, rear window defogger, electric cooling fans, front left door control system, rear left door control system

Adaptive front lighting system


Audio system

Front left door control system

Rear left door control system

Seat heaters, seat heaters and ventilators

VGRS, EPS, electronically controlled brake system, yaw rate & G sensor, dynamic radar cruise control system, rear view monitor system, moon roof


11

Fuse

PANEL

12

13

14

15

S/ROOF

FUEL OPEN

LH-B

TRK OPN

16 TV

17

18

A/C

FR P/SEAT LH

7.5

7.5

30

25

10

10

10

Ampere

7.5

Circuit

Steering switches, distance control switch, audio system, glove box light, switch illumination, cigarette lighter, shift lever light, touch screen, rear personal lights

Fuel lid opener, trunk opener

Theft deterrent system

Trunk opener

Touch screen, rear view monitor system


Power seat

4

413


■ Passenger’s side instrument panel

414

1

2

3

Fuse

ECU-IG RH

FR S/HTR RH

RH-IG

6

7

4

5

8

9

AM2

FR DOOR RH

RR DOOR RH

AIR SUS

PWR OUTLET

CIG

15

20

20

20

15

15

Ampere

10

15

7.5

Circuit

Electric tilt and telescopic steering, combination switch, power seat, smart access system with push-button start, air conditioning system, touch screen, shift lock system, tire pressure warning system, front/rear stabilizer system

Seat heaters, seat heaters and ventilators

Front right door control system, rear right door control system, seat belt pretensioners, transmission, seat heaters, seat heaters and ventilators

Starting system

Front right door control system

Rear right door control system

AVS

Power outlet

Cigarette lighter


10

11

Fuse

ACC

IGN

12

13

GAUGE

STR LOCK

14 SECURITY

15

16

17

18

19

TI & TE

AM1

STOP SW

OBD

FR P/SEAT RH

7.5

25

7.5

20

7.5

7.5

7.5

30

Ampere

7.5

10

Circuit

Audio system, smart access system with push-button start, touch screen, rear view monitor system, Lexus Link

System ECU

Smart access system with push-button start, SRS airbag system, stoplights, hybrid system, steering lock system, electronically controlled brake system, Lexus Link System

ECU, front passenger occupant classification system ECU

Gauges and meters

Steering lock system

Smart access system with push-button start

Electric tilt and telescopic steering

Stoplights, shift lock system

On-board diagnosis system

Power seat

4

415


■ Luggage compartment

416

1

2

3

4

5

Fuse

RR TAIL

STOP LP R

STOP LP L

RR FOG

RR-B

6

7

8

9

RR-IG1

RR-IG2

PSB

RR S/SHADE

10 RH J/B-B

11 LH J/B-B

12 R/B-B

10

10

30

7.5

30

Ampere

10

10

10

7.5

10

30

15

Circuit

Tail lights, license plate lights

High mounted stoplights, stoplights

Stoplights, back-up light

Trunk light

Pre-collision seat belt, seat belt pretensioners

Pre-collision seat belt

Rear sunshade

FR DOOR RH, RR DOOR RH,

AM2

FR DOOR LH, RR DOOR LH, 

RAD No.3

D/C cut


■ Luggage compartment 

(vehicles with active stabilizer suspension system)

1

2

3

Fuse

STB FR

STB RR

STB DC/DC

Ampere

50

30

30

Front stabilizer

Circuit

Rear stabilizer

DC/DC converter

■ After a fuse is replaced

● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. ( 

P. 421)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ If there is an overload in the circuits

The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.

4

417


CAUTION

■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire




Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.



Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.



This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

● Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.

418


Headlight aim

■ Gauges

High beam vertical position

Low beam vertical position

High beam horizontal position

Low beam horizontal position

■ Adjustment bolts

High beam horizontal adjustment

High beam vertical adjustment

Low beam adjustment bolt A

Low beam adjustment bolt B

■ Before checking the headlight aim

STEP 1

Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around the headlight is not deformed.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Sit in the driver’s seat.

Bounce the vehicle several times.

419

4


■ Adjusting the headlight aim

Low beam (vertical adjustment)

Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, turn adjustment bolt A so that the bubble is within the 2 center lines.

Remember the turning direction and the number of turns.

Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1.

Low beam (horizontal adjustment)

Turn adjustment bolt A so that the red line on the gauge is in the middle of the “0” mark (within the blue lines to either side of the gauge).

High beam (vertical and horizontal adjustment)

Turn each adjustment bolt in either direction so that the bubble in within the 2 center lines (vertical), and the red line on the gauge is in the middle of the “0” mark (within the blue lines to either side of the gauge) (horizontal).

If you feel that there is a large deviation, have the headlight aim adjusted at a Lexus dealer.

420


Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Prepare a replacement light bulb.

Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (

 P. 494)

■ Remove the engine compartment cover if necessary.



P. 370

■ Front bulb locations

■ Rear bulb locations

Rear turn signal light

Parking light

Headlight high beam

Back-up light

4

421


Replacing light bulbs

■ Headlight high beam

STEP 1

Unplug the connector while pushing the lock release.

STEP 2

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise to remove it.

422

■ Parking light

STEP 1

STEP 2

■ Back-up light

STEP 1

STEP 2


Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

Open the trunk lid. Remove the trunk handle and panel cover clips.

4

Partly remove the trunk panel cover and turn the bulb bases counterclockwise.

423


STEP 3


424

■ Rear turn signal light

STEP 1

Open the trunk lid and remove the cover.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.



■ Bulbs other than the above

If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer replace it.

● Headlight low beams (high-intensity discharge bulbs)

● Fog lights

● Front turn signal lights

● Front side marker lights

● Stop/tail lights

● Tail lights

● Rear side marker lights

● High mounted stoplight

● License plate lights

4

■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.

● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.

● Water has built up inside the headlight.

■ LED light bulbs

The tail, tail/stop and high mounted stoplights consist of a number of LEDs. If any

LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.

If two or more LEDs in a stoplight burn out, your vehicle may not conform to local laws (SAE).

■ High-intensity discharge (HID) headlights

If voltage to the high-intensity discharge bulbs is insufficient, the light may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The high-intensity discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored.

425


CAUTION

■ Replacing light bulbs

● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the headlights. 

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion.



If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

● Do not attempt to repair or disassemble light bulbs, connectors, electric circuits or component parts.



Doing so may result in serious injury due to electric shock.

■ High-intensity discharge (HID) headlights

● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing high-intensity discharge headlights

(including light bulbs).

● Do not touch the high voltage socket while the headlights are turned on.



20000V is momentarily generated and may cause severe injury by electric shock.

■ To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

426

When trouble arises

5

5-1. Essential information............ 428

If your vehicle needs to be  towed .......................................... 428

If you think something is  wrong.......................................... 435

Event data recorder................. 436

5-2. Steps to take in an  emergency............................ 438

If a warning light turns on or a  warning buzzer sounds... ......... 438

If a warning message is  displayed.................................... 444

If you have a flat tire (Vehicles  with run-flat tires)................... 460

If you have a flat tire (Vehicles  with standard tires).................. 461

If the hybrid system will not  start................................................ 471

If the shift lever cannot be  shifted from P............................ 472

If you lose your keys.................. 473

When the electronic key  battery is discharged............. 474

If the 12 volt battery is  discharged................................. 476

If your vehicle overheats ....... 480

If the vehicle becomes  stuck ............................................ 483

427

5-1. Essential information

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your

Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.



Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition.

If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer before towing.

● The hybrid system is running, but the vehicle will not move.

● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.



A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

428

5-1. Essential information

Towing eyelet

■ Emergency towing procedure

STEP 1 Release the parking brake.

STEP 2 Put the shift lever in “N”.

STEP 3 The power switch must be in the “ACC” mode (hybrid system off) or the

“IG-ON” mode (hybrid system on).

CAUTION

■ Caution while towing

● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.



Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cable or chain.

● If the hybrid system is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

5

NOTICE

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.



This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

429


Installing towing eyelet

STEP 1

STEP 2

Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body, as shown in the illustration.

Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

STEP 3

Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench.

■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet

 P. 461

430


CAUTION

■ Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.



If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.

Towing with a sling-type truck

NOTICE

■ To prevent body damage

Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear.

5

431


Towing with a wheel lift-type truck

From front

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.

432

From rear


Switch to “ACC” mode so that the steering wheel is unlocked.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damaging the vehicle

● Do not tow the vehicle with the power switch “OFF”. 

The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel straight.

● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

5

433


Using a flat bed truck

If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45  .

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

434


If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ Visible symptoms

● Fluid leaks under the vehicle 

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal

■ Audible symptoms

● Changes in exhaust sound

● Excessive tire squeal when cornering

● Strange noises related to the suspension system

● Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system

■ Operational symptoms

● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough

● Appreciable loss of power

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

5

435


Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.

Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event Data

Recorder (EDR).

In a crash or a near car crash event

The EDR may record some or all of the following information.

● Gasoline engine speed

● Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

● Vehicle speed

● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

● Position of the transmission shift lever

● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not

● Driver's seat position

● SRS airbag deployment data

● SRS airbag system diagnostic data

Your Lexus’ Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may contain another EDR.

There are a variety of driving situations which include activating the vehicle stability control (VSC) under which the VSC EDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR may record some or all of the following information:

● Behavior of the vehicle

● Steering wheel angle

● Vehicle speed

436


● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

● To what extent the brake pedal was applied

● To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of the 4 wheels

● Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.

Disclosure of the data

Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

● An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

● Officially requested by the police or other authorities

● Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit

● Ordered by a court

However, if necessary Lexus will:

● Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance

● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary

● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes

5

437

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer) *

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

 P. 450

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system while the hybrid system is running.

438

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details

Malfunction indicator lamp

Malfunction in:

• The hybrid system;

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system; or

• The transmission control system.

SRS warning light

Malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• The front passenger occupant classification system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system.

ABS warning light

Malfunction in:

• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system.

ECB * 1 /VSC warning light

Malfunction in:

• The electronically controlled brake system; or

• The VSC.

Electric power steering system warning light

Malfunction in the EPS.

Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)

Malfunction in the pre-collision system.

* 1 : Electronically Controlled Brake System

5

439


Have the malfunction repaired immediately.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.


Open door warning light 

(warning buzzer) * 2

A door or the trunk is not fully closed.

Low fuel level warning light

Remaining fuel 

(Approximately 2.6 gal. [10

L, 2.2 Imp.gal.] or less)


Check that all doors and the trunk are closed.

Refuel the vehicle.

Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer) * 3

Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.


(warning buzzer) * 3

Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Tire pressure warning light

When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure.

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure.

Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.

440



Master warning light

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.


Take appropriate action in accordance with the message displayed on the multi-information display.

* 2

: Open door warning buzzer:

 P. 449

* 3 :Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminder buzzer:

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at lest 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

● Is your vehicle low on gas?



If it is, refuel the vehicle immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?



If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after taking several driving trips.



If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder

● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

5

441


■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the following:

● The airbag sensor assembly

● Front airbag sensors

● The curtain shield airbag sensors

● The side and curtain shield airbag sensors

● The occupant detection sensor

● The front passenger occupant classification ECU

● “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights

● The pressure sensor

● The belt tension sensor

● The seat belt buckle switches

● The driver's seat position sensor

● The inflators

● The warning light

● The interconnecting wiring and power sources

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light.

442


CAUTION

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

● Vehicles with run-flat tires:

• Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon as possible. Do not drive over 55 mph (90 km/h).

• Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Have the tire replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer.

• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

● Vehicles with standard tires:

• Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest

Lexus dealer.

• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

5

443


If a warning message is displayed

If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:



The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.

If any of the warning light turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Lexus dealer.

Stop the vehicle immediately.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

Warning message Details

Malfunction in the hybrid system.

(Flashing)

Abnormal engine oil pressure.

The warning light may turn on if the engine oil pressure is too low.

444



A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.



Malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system.

Malfunction in the rear lights system.

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.

The tire pressure warning light will blink for 1 minute and then stay on.

5

(Flashing)

Malfunction in the steering lock system.

445



Malfunction in the active stabilizer suspension system.

(If equipped)



Malfunction in the PCS.

(If equipped)

(If equipped)

Intuitive parking assist malfunction.

The malfunctioning sensor is shown flashing on the display. (The illustration shows malfunctioning left front sensor.)

(Flashing) 

Malfunction in the radar cruise control system.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Switch the power switch to “OFF” and then to “IG-ON” mode again to reset the cruise control system.

(If equipped)

446


■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative

The system will be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.

● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.

● If the tire inflation pressure is more than 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm 2 or bar).

The system may be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.

● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

● If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting.

● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings.

● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.

● If tire chains are used.

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently

If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently when the power switch is turned to “IG-ON” mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

5

NOTICE

■ Precaution when installing a different tire

When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

447



Failing to investigate the cause of the following warning may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.


Malfunction in the TRAC, VSC or hill-start assist control system.

In some cases, only “CHECK VSC” or “CHECK

ECB

*

” is displayed.

(U.S.A)

(Canada)

Malfunction in the ABS or BA.

In some cases, only “CHECK VSC” or “CHECK

ECB

*

” is displayed.

Malfunction in the VGRS.

(Steering guide symbol and arrows are flashing)

The steering sensor cable is broken and signals cannot be received.

*: Electronically Controlled Brake System

448



A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message turns off.


One or more of the doors is not fully closed.

The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed.

flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

The hood is not fully closed.

flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that hood is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).


Make sure that all of the doors are closed.

Close the hood.

5

449


Warning message

(Flashing)

(Flashing)

Details

The trunk is not fully closed.

flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that trunk is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).


Close the trunk.

The moon roof is not fully closed (with the power switch “OFF” and the driver’s door opened).

Close the moon roof.

The parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of more than 3 mph [5 km/h]).

Release the parking brake.

The washer fluid level is low.

Add washer fluid.

The hybrid system has overheated.

Stop and check. 

( 

P. 480)

450


Warning message Details Correction procedure

The engine oil level is low.

Check the engine oil level, and add if necessary.

(U.S.A. only)

(U.S.A. only)

The engine oil is scheduled to be changed.

Comes on approximately

4500 miles (7200 km) after the engine oil is changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil maintenance data has been reset).

The engine oil should be changed.

Comes on approximately

5000 miles (8000 km) after the engine oil is changed (and the oil maintenance data has been reset).

Check the engine oil, and change if necessary.

Check and change the engine oil.

5

451


Warning message



Details Correction procedure

Low tire inflation pressure.

Check the tire inflation pressure, and adjust to the appropriate level.

(Flashing) 

(If equipped)

(If equipped)

The PCS is not currently functional.

Clean the grille and the sensor.

This message appears when the pre-collision system is hot. In this case, wait until the system cools down.

Intuitive parking assist is dirty or covered with ice.

(The illustration shows something on the left front sensor.)

Clean the sensor.

(Flashing) 

The radar cruise control sensor is dirty or covered with ice.

Clean the sensor.

(If equipped)

452


Warning message

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

(Flashing)

(If equipped)



Details

The radar cruise control system is unable to judge vehicle-to-vehicle distance.


• Switch the mode select to either the normal or power mode.

• If the windshield wipers are on, turn them off or set them to either the intermittent or the slow mode.

Your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in radar cruise mode).

Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

The vehicle is unable to drive over 60 mph (or

120 km/h) until the transmission warms up.

Wait until the transmission warms up.

5

The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.

Stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to “P”.

(Flashing)

(Flashing)

The gasoline engine cannot operate or the shift lever is in “N” for a long time.

Stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to “P”.

453


Warning message

(Flashing)

Details Correction procedure

The transmission is out of

“P” when attempting to start the hybrid system.

Shift the shift lever to “P” before pressing the power switch.

■ After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. ( 

P. 374)

■ Approach warning message

In the following instances, there is the possibility that the approach warning will not activate even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance decreases.

● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle.

● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed.

● Immediately after cruise control speed is set.

● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed.

454


CAUTION

■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

5

455


Messages displayed when refueling

The following messages are displayed after the fuel lid opener is pressed.

If the messages do not change or are displayed continuously, have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

Message Details

Preparing the vehicle for refueling.

Wait a moment.

You may commence refueling.

Finish refueling within 30 minutes.

Close the fuel lid.

Other messages

If the following message is displayed, take appropriate action and confirm that the message has disappeared.

Message Details

(Flashing)

The driver’s door is opened when the transmission is out of “P” with the hybrid system on.

Shift the shift lever to “P”.

Calibrate the neutral position of the steering wheel.

( 

P. 153)

456

(If equipped)



After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning massage and light turn off.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Warning message

Once 

(Comes on for 8 seconds.)

(Flashing)

Details


The electronic key is not detected when attempting to start the hybrid system.

Confirm the location of the electronic key.

Once 3 times

(Flashing)

An open door other than the driver's door is closed while the electronic key is outside the detection range and the power switch is in

“ACC” or “IG-

ON” mode.

Confirm the location of the electronic key.

5

457


Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Once 3 times

Continuous

Continuous

Warning message

(Flashing)

(Displayed alternately)

(Flashing)

Details



“ACC” or “IG-

ON” mode with the shift lever in

“P”.


“OFF” or confirm the location of the electronic key.


“ACC” or “IG-

ON” mode with the shift lever not in “P”.

• Shift the shift lever to “P”.

• Confirm the location of the electronic key.

Once 

(Flashing)

The electronic key battery is low.

Replace the battery.

(

 P. 401)

458


Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Warning message









(Flashing)

Details


An open door has been closed and the power switch has been turned twice to the

“ACC” mode from

“OFF” mode.

Press the power switch while applying the brakes.

The steering lock has not released within 3 seconds of pressing the power switch. The power switch indicator will flash green for 15 seconds.

Press the power switch again while turning the steering wheel with the brake pedal depressed.

5

459


If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with run-flat tires)

Take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as soon as possible.

■ Run-flat tires (A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall)

You can continue driving a vehicle with run-flat tires even if any tire goes flat.

It is able to run for a maximum of

100 miles (160 km) at a speed below 55 mph (90 km/h) after the tire pressure warning light comes on. (

 P. 440)

■ In some condition (such as at high temperatures)

You can not continue driving for up to 100 miles (160 km).

■ If you cannot distinguish between the standard tires and run-flat tires

Consult your Lexus dealer.

■ For the detailed information on run-flat tires

See the tire warranty book.

NOTICE

■ When replacing the tires

● Have the tires replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.

● Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well.


Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

460


If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with standard tires)

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

■ Before jacking up the vehicle

● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

● Set the parking brake.

● Shift the shift lever to “P”.

● Stop the hybrid system.

● Turn on the emergency flashers.

■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Jack handle Tools

Towing eyelet

Jack

Tighten Loosen

5

Wheel nut wrench Spare tire

461


■ Compact spare tire

The compact tire saves space in your luggage compartment, and its lighter weight helps to enhance fuel economy and permits easier installation in case of a flat tire.

The compact spare tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

■ The compact spare tire

● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall.



Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. 

( 

P. 493)

■ Tread life

The compact spare tire can be used many times, if necessary. It has tread life of up to 3000 miles (4800 km) depending on road conditions and your driving habits.

When treadwear indicators appear on the tire, replace the tire. (

 P. 383)

■ When using the compact spare tire

As the spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

462


Taking out the spare tire

STEP 1

Lift up the hook of the panel on the trunk floor.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Secure the panel using the hook provided.

Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

5

463


Replacing a flat tire

STEP 1

Chock the tires.

Front

Rear

STEP 2

Flat tire

Left-hand side

Right-hand side

Left-hand side

Right-hand side

Wheel chock positions

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Behind the rear left-hand side tire

In front of the front right-hand side tire

In front of the front left-hand side tire

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).

464

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5


Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

5

465


Installing the spare tire

STEP 1

STEP 2

Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle.

Tapered portion

Disc wheel  sheet

Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each nut by hand to approximately the same amount.

Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel sheet.

STEP 3

Lower the vehicle.

466

STEP 4


Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque: 

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

STEP 5 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

■ If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.

Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehicle.

STEP 3 Fit tire chains to the rear tires.

■ After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (

 P. 384)

5

467


CAUTION

■ Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.

● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. 

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.

● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.

● Do not start or run the hybrid system while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured.

■ Replacing a flat tire

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury.

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.



The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident.

Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.



Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

468


CAUTION

■ When using the spare tire

● Remember that your spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle.

Do not use your spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use two spare tires simultaneously.

● Replace the spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.

■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident.

5

469


NOTICE

■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.



Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.

■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.



Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

■ When replacing the tires

● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

● Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well.


Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

470


If the hybrid system will not start

If the hybrid system will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed ( 

P. 103), consider each of the following points.

■ The hybrid system will not start even if you are carrying the correct electronic key

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

● The electronic key battery may be discharged. ( 

P. 17)

● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.



Add fuel to the vehicle.

● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.

● There may be a malfunction in the hybrid vehicle immobilizer system. 

( 

P. 59)

■ The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume


● The 12 volt battery may be discharged. ( 

P. 476)

● The 12 volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

■ The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound


● One or both of the 12 volt battery terminals may be disconnected.

● The 12 volt battery may be discharged. ( 

P. 476)

Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

5

471


If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.



The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Set the parking brake.

Turn the power switch to the “ACC” mode.

Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.

STEP 5

Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

472


If you lose your keys

New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using one of the other keys and the key number stamped on your key number plate.

473

5


When the electronic key battery is discharged

If the electronic key battery is discharged, the doors and trunk can be opened by the mechanical key. The hybrid system can be still started by following the procedure.

Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions

Doors

Using the mechanical key in order to perform the following operations:

Locks all doors

Closes the windows/moon roof

(turn and hold)

Unlocks the door

Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows/moon roof

(turn and hold)

Trunk

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.

474


Starting the hybrid system

STEP 1

STEP 2

Put the shift lever in “P” and apply the brakes.

Hold the electronic key close to the power switch (within 0.4 in. [10 mm]). Make sure that the button side of the key is facing away from the power switch.

An alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the key with the depleted battery if any of the doors will be opened and closed while this operation.

STEP 3 Press the power switch within 5 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake pedal depressed.

If the hybrid system still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Replacing the key battery

As this procedure is the temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately. (

 P. 401)

5

475


If the 12 volt battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the 12 volt battery is discharged.



You can call your Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Lexus Customer

Service.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12 volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps below.

STEP 1 Open the trunk using the mechanical key. (

 P. 474)

STEP 2

476

Connecting the jumper cables.

If required, remove all vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle.

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Negative (-) battery terminal on your vehicle.

STEP 3

STEP 4

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12 volt battery of your vehicle.

Open and close any of the doors with the power switch “OFF”.


STEP 5

STEP 6

Maintain the engine speed on the second vehicle and turn the power switch to the “IG-ON” mode, then start the vehicle’s hybrid system.

Make sure the “READY” light comes on. If the light does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.

STEP 7

Once the vehicle’s hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.

Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.


● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.

● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

■ When the 12 volt battery is removed or discharged

The hybrid system may not start. ( 

P. 380)

Also, the following systems must be initialized.

● Power windows (

 P. 51)

● Variable gear ratio steering ( 

P. 153)

● Tire pressure warning system ( 

P. 385)

● Intuitive parking assist (

 P. 153)

5

477


CAUTION

■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals.

● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the battery.

■ Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:

● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

● Do not lean over the battery.

● If the battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.



Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

● Do not allow children near the battery.

478


NOTICE

■ To prevent damaging the vehicle

Hybrid vehicles cannot be push-started.

■ When handling jumper cables

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

5

479


If your vehicle overheats

■ Electric motor (traction motor) and inverter

If the message “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” is displayed on the multi-information display.

■ Gasoline engine

If the needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone, the gasoline engine has probably overheated.

Observe the following steps:

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air conditioning system.

Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.

If you see steam: 

Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood.

If you do not see steam: 

Leave the hybrid system running and carefully lift the hood.

Remove the engine compartment cover. ( 

P. 370)

Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.

If the fan is operating: 

Wait until the engine coolant temperature gauge begins to fall and then stop the hybrid system.

If the fan is not operating: 

Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your local

Lexus dealer.

After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, check the coolant level and inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

480

STEP 6


Add coolant if required.

Water can be used in an emergency measure if coolant is unavailable. (

 P. 490)

Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ Overheating

In the following situations, your vehicle may be overheating.

● The message “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” is displayed on the multi-information display.

● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced.

● Steam is coming from under the hood.

5

CAUTION

■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and engine drive belt while the hybrid system is running.

● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot.



Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.

481


NOTICE

■ When adding coolant

Wait until the hybrid system has cooled down before adding coolant.



When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.

482


If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever in “P”.

Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.

Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires.

Restart the hybrid system.

Turn off TRAC. ( 

P. 166)

Carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.

CAUTION

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.



This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

5

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the wheels and racing the hybrid system.

● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

483


484

Vehicle specifications

6

6-1. Specifications ......................... 486

Maintenance data..................... 486

Fuel information......................... 495

Tire information.......................... 498

6-2. Customization......................... 510

Customizable features ............ 510

6-3. Initialization.............................. 514

Items to initialize......................... 514

485

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

Dimensions and weight

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height *

Wheelbase

Front

Tread

Vehicle capacity weight 

(Occupants + luggage)

Rear

* :Unladen vehicle

189.9 in. (4825 mm)

71.6 in. (1820 mm)

56.1 in. (1425 mm)

112.2 in. (2850 mm)

60.4 in. (1535 mm)

60.6 in. (1540 mm)

815 lb. (370 kg)

486

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle identification

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the engine compartment.

This number is also on the Certification Label.

■ The engine number and electric motor (traction motor) number

6

These numbers are stamped on the locations shown in the above illustration.

487

6-1. Specifications

Engine

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Drive belt tension

2GR-FSE

6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

3.70  3.27 in. (94.0  83.0 mm)

210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm

3

)

Automatic adjustment

Fuel

Fuel type

Octane Rating

Fuel tank capacity

Premium unleaded gasoline only

91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher

17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 lmp.gal.)


Type

Maximum output

Maximum torque

Permanent magnet synchronous motor

147 kW

275 N•m (28.0 kgf•m, 202.8 ft•lbf.)

Hybrid battery (Traction battery)

Type

Voltage

Capacity

Quantity

Overall voltage

Nickel-Metal hydride battery

7.2 V/module

6.5 Ah (3HR)

40 modules

288 V

488

6-1. Specifications

Lubrication system

Oil capacity 

(drain and refill) with filter without filter

Oil grade

6.6 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 lmp.qt.)

6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 lmp.qt.)

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the above grade and viscosity.

Recommended oil viscosity

Outside temperature

* :5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel efficiency.

Oil viscosity:

● The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

● The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is as its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.

6

489

6-1. Specifications

Cooling system

Capacity

Gasoline engine

Inverter

Coolant type

9.8 qt. (9.3 L, 8.1 lmp.qt.)

3.0 qt. (2.9 L, 2.5 lmp.qt.)

Use either of the following:

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system

Spark plug

Make DENSO 

NGK

Gap

FK20HBR11 

ILFR6D11T

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

490

6-1. Specifications

Electrical system

12 volt battery

Open voltage at

68  F (20  C):

Charging rates

Differential

Oil capacity

Oil type and viscosity

Transmission

Fluid capacity

Drain and refill

Fluid type

12.6  12.8V Fully charged 

12.2  12.4V Half charged 

11.8  12.0V Discharged 

(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the hybrid system and all lights are turned off.)

5A max.

1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 lmp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT

75W-85

5.7 qt. (5.4 L, 4.8 lmp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

■ Transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

6

491

6-1. Specifications

Brakes

Pedal clearance * 1

Pedal free play

Brake pad wear limit

Parking brake pedal travel * 2

Parking brake lining wear limit

2.9 in. (73 mm) Min.

Less than 0.08 in. (2.0 mm)

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

7  9 clicks

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

* 1

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 200 N (20.4 kgf, 45 lbf) while the hybrid system is running.

* 2 : Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 300 N (30.6 kgf,

67.4 lbf).

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

492

6-1. Specifications

Tires and wheels

Tire size

Front and rear tire inflation  pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

245/40R18 93Y, P245/40R18 93V, 

245/40ZR18, T155/70D17 110M (spare)

Driving under normal conditions 

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

2

or bar)

Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

2 or bar) to the

Spare tire inflation pressure 

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

18  8 J, 17  4T (spare)

2

or bar)

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

6

493

6-1. Specifications

Light bulbs

Exterior

Light Bulbs

Headlights (low beam)

Headlights (high beam)

Front turn signal lights

Parking lights

Fog lights

Front side marker light

Rear turn signal lights

Back-up lights

Interior

Trunk light

Vanity lights

A: D4S high-intensity discharge bulbs 

B: HB3 halogen bulbs 

C: Wedge base bulbs (amber) 

D: Wedge base bulbs (clear) 

E: HB4 halogen bulbs 

F: Double end bulbs

Bulb No.

HB4

194



921





D4S

HB3





21

5

51

5

W

35

60

5

8

21

16

E

D

C

D

Type

A

B

F

D

C

D

494


Fuel information

Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.



Premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating 91 (Research Octane

Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of

ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

■ If premium gasoline is not available

If 91 Octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an Octane

Rating as low as 87 (Reseach Octane Number 91).



However, use of unleaded fuel with an Octane Rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking or drastically reduce output to protect itself while driving with a heavy load. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.

■ If your engine knocks

● Consult your Lexus dealer.

● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.

6

495

6-1. Specifications

■ Gasoline quality standards

● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.

● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.

● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance.

■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.

● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems.

■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.

Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline

● Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.

● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

● Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.

496

6-1. Specifications

NOTICE

■ Notice on gasoline quality

● Do not use leaded gasoline.



Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.



Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated here will cause persistent heavy knocking.



At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■ When refueling with gasohole

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

6

497


Tire information

Typical tire symbols

498

Tire size

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

( 

P. 500)

( 

P. 499)

(

 P. 383)

Location of treadwear indicators

Run-flat tire (RFT) or standard tire (  P. 460)

This vehicle can be equipped with either run-flat tires (RFT) or standard tires. A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall of the run-flat tire.

Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

6-1. Specifications

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a bias-ply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

( 

P. 503)

( 

P. 503)

Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Summer tire or all season tire ( 

P. 388)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.

“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (  P. 462)

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)

DOT symbol *

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

6

* : The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards.

499

6-1. Specifications

Tire size

■ Typical tire size information

■ Tire dimensions

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use 

(P = Passenger car, 

T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio 

(tire height to section width)

Tire construction code 

(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index (2 or 3 digits)

Speed symbol 

(alphabet with one letter)

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

500

6-1. Specifications

Tire section names

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the

U.S.A. Department of Transportation.



It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

■ DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

6

501

6-1. Specifications

■ Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.



The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

502

6-1. Specifications

Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.



Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term

Cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum inflation pressure

Recommended inflation pressure

Accessory weight

Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

Normal occupant weight

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

The sum of: 

(a) Curb weight 

(b) Accessory weight 

(c) Vehicle capacity weight 

(d) Production options weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 * that follows

6

503

6-1. Specifications

Production options weight

Rim

Tire related term

Occupant distribution

Meaning

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 * below

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter 

(Wheel diameter)

Rim size designation

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim type designation

Rim diameter and width

The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code

Nominal distance between rim flanges Rim width

Vehicle capacity weight

(Total load capacity)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

Vehicle normal load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 * below), and dividing it by two

504

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Weather side

Bead

Bead separation

Bias ply tire

Carcass

Chunking

Cord

Cord separation

Cracking

CT

Extra load tire

Groove

Meaning

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

The strands forming the plies in the tire

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

6

505

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Innerliner

Innerliner separation

Intended outboard sidewall

Light truck (LT) tire

Load rating

Maximum load rating

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

Measuring rim

Open splice

Outer diameter

Overall width

Meaning

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b) The outward facing sidewall of asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

506

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Passenger car tire

Ply

Ply separation

Pneumatic tire

Radial ply tire

Reinforced tire

Section width

Sidewall

Sidewall separation

Meaning

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

6

507

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Snow tire

Test rim

Tread

Tread rib

Tread separation

Treadwear indicators

(TWI)

Wheel-holding fixture

Meaning

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard

Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test

Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a

Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( on at least one sidewall

)

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

508

6-1. Specifications

* :Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

2 through 4

5 through 10

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

2

3

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

11 through 15

16 through 20

5

7

2 in front

2 in front, 1 in second seat

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

6

509

6-2. Customization

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus dealership.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

Item Function

Smart access system with push-button start 

( 

P. 13)

Smart access system with push-button start

Operation signal 

(Emergency flashers)

Operation signal 

(Buzzer)

Default setting

ON

ON

Wireless remote control 

( 

P. 22)

Unlocking operation

Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

ON

Driver's door unlocked in 1step, all doors unlocked  in 2-step

60 seconds

Customized setting

OFF

OFF

OFF

All doors unlocked in 1-step

OFF

30 seconds

120 seconds

510

6-2. Customization

Item

Wireless remote control 

( 

P. 22)

Door lock

( 

P. 25)

Function

Operation indicator 

(Emergency flashers)

Operation indicator

(Buzzer)

Trunk unlocking function

Default setting

ON

ON

ON

Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold

Panic function

Buzzer sounds when pushing with any door not closed

ON

ON

Unlocking using a key

Speed-detecting automatic door lock function

Opening driver's door unlocks all doors

Shift the shift lever to “P” unlocks all doors

Shift the shift lever to position other than “P” locks all doors

Driver's door unlocked in 1step, all doors unlocked  in 2-step

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Customized setting

OFF

OFF

OFF

Push twice

One short push

OFF

OFF

All doors unlocked in 1-step

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

6

511

6-2. Customization

Item

Power windows 

( 

P. 50)

Moon roof 

( 

P. 52)

Automatic light control system 

( 

P. 122)

Function Default setting

Linked door lock operation

Linked door key operation

Wireless remote control linked operation

Linked door lock operation

ON

Open and close

ON

ON

Linked door key operation

Linked operation of components when door key is used

Wireless remote control linked operation

Linked operation of components when wireless remote control used

Light sensor sensitivity

Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed

Daytime running light

Open and close

Slide only

ON

Slide only

Level 3

30 seconds

ON

*: Vehicles sold outside Canada

Customized setting

OFF

Open only

Close only

OFF

OFF

Open only

Close only

Tilt only

OFF

Tilt only

Levels 1 to 5

0 seconds

60 seconds

90 seconds

OFF*

512

6-2. Customization

Item Function Default setting

(

Windshield wipers and washer 

( 

P. 126)

Illumination



P. 303)



Switching operation when the vehicle is stationary

Drip prevention function

ON

Time elapsed before the drip prevention function operates

ON

Variable depending on the vehicle speed

Time elapsed before lights turn off

Operation when the doors are unlocked

Operation after the power switch turned

“OFF”

Front/rear personal lights turned on when a door is opened

Foot lights

Shift lever light

Outer foot light

15 seconds

ON

ON

Corresponding light only

ON

ON

ON

Rear sunshade 

( 

P. 324)

Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates

0.7 seconds

Customized setting

OFF

OFF

3 seconds

7.5 seconds

30 seconds

OFF

OFF

All lights

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

0 seconds

0.9 seconds

1.2 seconds

6

513

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize

After reconnecting or performing maintenance on the 12 volt battery, the hybrid system may not start. (

 P. 380) Also, the following items must be

initialized for normal system operation.

Item

Power window

Variable gear ratio steering

Intuitive parking assist

Engine oil maintenance data

When to initialize

• After reconnecting or changing the battery

• After changing a fuse

• After changing engine oil

Tire pressure warning system

• When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.

• When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.

• When changing the tire size.

Reference

P. 51

P. 153

P. 153

P. 374

P. 385

514

For US owners

7


U.S. owners................................ 516

515

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline tollfree at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov

; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov

.

516

Index

Alphabetical index

What to do if...

518

526

517

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index

A

A/C (Air conditioning system)........ 192

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)........ 164

Active stabilizer suspension 

system...................................................... 164

Air conditioning system (A/C)

Air conditioning filter .......................399

Automatic air conditioning 

system....................................................192

Airbags

Airbag operating conditions...........69

Airbag precautions for your 

child...........................................................72

Airbag warning light ........................439

Curtain shield airbag 

precautions .......................................... 75

General airbag precautions ............72

Locations of airbags............................66

Modification and disposal of 

airbags.................................................... 76

Side airbag precautions.....................72

Side and curtain shield airbags 

operating conditions .......................69

SRS airbags .............................................66

Alarm ............................................................. 61

Antenna ....................................................209

Armrest.....................................................323

Ashtrays..................................................... 316

Audio system

Antenna..................................................209

Cassette player.....................................212

CD player/changer ...........................216

DVD information.................................251

DVD player/changer...................... 232

DVD video/audio.............................235

MP3/WMA disc............................... 224

Optimal use..........................................255

Radio........................................................203

518

Steering switches .............................. 259

Video CD..............................................247

Automatic headlight leveling 

system ......................................................124

Automatic light control system.........122


Suspension System)...........................163

B

BA (Brake Assist)...................................164

Back-up lights

Wattage................................................. 494

Battery

12 volt battery.......................................379

Checking................................................379

Hybrid battery (Traction battery) ....5

If the 12 volt battery is 

discharged .........................................476

Preparing and checking 

before winter...................................... 176

Bluetooth

®

.............................................. 263

Brake

Fluid.......................................................... 378

Parking brake............................................111

C Care

Exterior................................................... 352

Interior..................................................... 354

Seat belts ...............................................355

Cargo capacity........................................172

Cargo hooks .......................................... 327

CD player/changer............................. 232

Chains .........................................................177

Child-protectors...................................... 26

Child restraint system (CRS)

Definition ...................................................82

Installation ................................................ 85

Alphabetical index

Installing CRS with lower 

anchorages..........................................89

Installing CRS with seatbelts ..........85

Installing CRS with top straps........90

Child safety

Airbag precautions ..............................72

Child restraint system ........................ 82

Child-protectors....................................26

How your child should wear 

the seatbelt............................................43

Installing child restraints....................85

Moon roof................................................ 54

Power window lock switch .............50

Power window precautions..............51

Removed electronic key battery 

precautions ....................................... 402

Seat belt comfort guide....................... 41

Seat belt precautions...........................44

Seat heater precautions.........319, 321

Trunk............................................................32

Cigarette lighter..................................... 317

Cleaning

Exterior................................................... 352

Interior.....................................................354

Seat belts ...............................................355

Clock...........................................................314

Coin holder ............................................ 309

Compass ................................................. 334

Condenser...............................................377

Console box........................................... 307

Cooling system

Engine overheating..........................480

Cruise control

Cruise control........................................129

Dynamic radar cruise control........132

Cup holders .............................................310

Curtain shield airbags............................66

Customizable features........................510

D

Daytime running light system ........... 123

Defogger

Rear window......................................... 199

Side mirror.............................................. 199

Dimension................................................486

Dinghy towing......................................... 182

Display

Energy flow................................................. 6

Multi-information display..................119

Touch screen ........................................184

Trip information ................................... 120

Warning message.............................444

Do-it-yourself maintenance.............363

Door courtesy lights............................304

Door pocket...............................................311

Doors

Door lock..................................................25

Rear door child protector ................26

Driver's seat belt reminder light .....440

Driving

Correct posture.....................................64

Procedures ..............................................96

DVD player/changer..........................232

E Electronic key

Replacing battery................................401

When the electronic key battery 

is discharged.....................................474

519

Alphabetical index

520

Emergency, in case of

If a warning light turns on ..............438

If a warning message is 

displayed ............................................444

If the hybrid system will not 

start..........................................................471

If the shift lever cannot be 

shifted from P....................................472

If the 12 volt battery is 

discharged ....................................... 476

If you have a flat tire ..............460, 461

If you lose your keys......................... 473

If you think something is 

wrong...................................................435

If your vehicle becomes stuck.....483

If your vehicle needs to be 

towed ...................................................428

If your vehicle overheats............... 480


is discharged .................................... 474

Energy monitor............................................ 6

Engine

Compartment .....................................369

Hood........................................................366

How to start the hybrid system ... 103

If the hybrid system will not 

start..........................................................471

Overheating........................................ 480

Power switch ........................................ 103

Engine compartment cover .............370

Engine coolant temperature 

gauge.........................................................112

Engine/inverter coolant

Capacity.................................................490

Checking...............................................376


before winter......................................176

Engine oil

Capacity ................................................489

Checking................................................. 371


before winter...................................... 176

Engine oil maintenance data ........... 374

EPS (Electric Power Steering) .........164

Event data recorder............................436

F

First-aid kit storage belt ..................... 327

Floor mats................................................ 326

Fluid

Brake....................................................... 378

Washer................................................... 382

Fog lights

Switch........................................................ 125

Wattage................................................. 494

Foot light ..................................................304

Front passenger occupant 

classification system.............................77

Front passenger's seat belt 

reminder light .....................................440

Front seats

Adjustment ...............................................33

Driving position memory ..................35

Front turn signal lights

Wattage................................................. 494

Fuel

Capacity ................................................488

Fuel gauge................................................112

Gas station information .................528

Information ........................................... 495

Refueling................................................... 55

Messages..............................................456

Fuel filler door...........................................55

Fuses..........................................................403

Alphabetical index

G

Garage door opener.......................... 329

Gas station information..................... 528

Gauges.........................................................112

Glove box ............................................... 307

H

Hands-free system ................................261

Head restraints......................................... 38

Headlight aim ..........................................419

Headlight cleaner ..................................128

Headlights

AFS (Adaptive Front lighting 

System) ................................................. 123

Discharge headlights 

precautions ....................................... 426

Replacing light bulbs ......................... 421

Switch........................................................ 122

Wattage ................................................. 494

Heaters

Seat heaters..................................319, 321

Side mirror..............................................199

Hill-start assist control .........................164

Hood ......................................................... 366

Hooks

Cargo.......................................................327

Shopping bag.......................................327

Hybrid system

..................................................2

Emergency shut off system.................6

Energy monitor/consumption 

screen.........................................................6

High voltage components...................5

Power meter............................................112

Power switch.........................................103

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer 

system....................................................... 59

I

Illuminated entry system....................303

I/M test......................................................362

Indicator lights...........................................116

Initialization

Items to initialize .................................. 514

Inside rear view mirror .......................... 47

Instrument panel light control ............113

Interior lights

Interior lights........................................ 304

Wattage..................................................494

Intuitive parking assist............................141

J Jack

Positioning the jack...........................367

Replacing the wheel.......................... 461

Jack handle............................................... 461

K Keys

If you lose your keys.........................473

Key number plate .................................... 11

Keys ................................................................ 11

Power switch.........................................103

Mechanical key......................................... 11


is discharged.....................................474

Wireless remote control................... 22

L

Lexus Link System............................... 338

Light bulbs

Replacing .................................................421

Wattage..................................................494

Light sensitive optitron meter.............114

Lights

Fog light switch .................................... 125

Headlights switch.................................122

Interior lights list................................. 303

521

Alphabetical index

Replacing light bulbs..........................421

Turn signal lever.................................... 110

Vanity lights............................................313

Wattage..................................................494

M Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance.........363

General maintenance.....................359

Maintenance data..............................486

Maintenance requirements..........357

Meter

Instrument panel light control .........113

Meters .........................................................112

Micro dust and pollen removal 

mode........................................................195

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror........................47

Side mirror heater...............................199

Side mirrors.............................................48

Vanity mirrors........................................313

Moon roof...................................................52

MP3 disc

...................................................... 224


....................... 119

O

Odometer...................................................112

Oil

Engine oil .................................................371

Opener

Fuel filler door.........................................55

Hood........................................................366

Trunk........................................................... 29

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjusting and folding .........................48

Driving position memory..................35

Outside temperature display............ 315

Overhead console .............................. 308

522

Overheating, Engine

.............................480

P

Parking brake..............................................111

Parking lights

Replacing light bulbs......................... 421

Switch.........................................................122

Wattage................................................. 494

PCS (Pre-Collision System)..............165

Personal lights........................................305

Power meter.............................................. 112

Power outlet ............................................ 318

Power windows........................................50

R

Radar cruise control..............................132

Radiator.....................................................377

Radio

.............................................................. 203

RDS (Radio Data System) ................205

Rear sunshade....................................... 324

Rear turn signal lights


Wattage................................................. 494

Rear view monitor system ................. 160

Rear window defogger ........................199

Replacing

Electronic key battery.......................401

Fuses........................................................403

Light bulbs .............................................. 421


U.S. owners............................................516

S Seat belts

Adjusting the seat belt ..........................41

Automatic Locking Retractor 

(ALR).......................................................42

Child restraint system 

installation............................................. 85

Alphabetical index

Cleaning and maintaining 

the seat belts.....................................355

Emergency Locking Retractor 

(ELR)........................................................42

How to wear your seat belt............. 40

How your child should wear 

the seat belt...........................................43

Pre-collision seat belts........................42

Pregnant women, 

proper seat belt use..........................42

Reminder light.....................................440

Seat belt extenders...............................43

Seat belt pretensioners........................ 41

Seat heaters....................................319, 321

Seat ventilators........................................321

Seating capacity .....................................175

Seats

Child seats/child restraint 

system installation.............................85

Cleaning ................................................354

Driving position memory ................. 35

Head restraint ........................................ 38

Properly sitting in the seat.................64

Seat adjustment......................................33

Seat adjustment precautions...........33

Seat heaters..................................319, 321

Ventilated seats.................................... 321

Service reminder indicators ...............117

Shift lever


shifted from P....................................472

Transmission..........................................106

Shift lock system ....................................472

Shopping bag hooks............................327

Side airbags................................................66

Side marker lights

Switch........................................................ 122

Side mirror

Adjusting and folding..........................48


Smart access system with  push-button start

Antenna location.....................................15

Entry function............................................13

Starting the hybrid system..............103

Spare tire

Inflation pressure................................493

Spare tire................................................462

Spark plug................................................490

Specifications .........................................486

Speedometer ............................................112

Steering wheel

Adjustment...............................................46

Audio switches....................................259


Storage compartment ........................309

Storage feature......................................306

Stuck

If your vehicle becomes stuck.... 483

Sun visors .................................................. 312

Switch

Fog light switch .................................... 125

Light switches ........................................122

Mode select switch............................ 107

Power door lock switch ....................25

Power switch.........................................103

Power window switch....................... 50

Window lock switch........................... 50

Wipers and washer switch .............126

523

Alphabetical index

T Tail lights

Switch ........................................................122

Theft deterrent system

Alarm ............................................................61

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer 

system.....................................................59

Theft prevention labels..........................63

Tire inflation pressure .........................493

Tire information

Glossary.................................................503

Size .......................................................... 500

Tire identification number .............499

Uniform tire quality grading.......... 501

Tires

Chains....................................................... 177

Checking...............................................383

Compact spare tire..........................462

If you have a flat tire...............460, 461

Inflation pressure................................493

Information............................................498

Pressure warning system ..............383

Replacing.................................................461

Rotating tires........................................383

Size ...........................................................493

Snow tires................................................179

Tools............................................................ 461

Total load capacity ................................ 175

Touch screen...........................................184

Towing

Dinghy towing.......................................182

Emergency towing ...........................429

Trailer towing.......................................... 181

TRAC (Traction control).................... 164

Transmission


shifted from P....................................472

Mode select switch.............................107

524

S mode .....................................................108

Transmission..........................................106

Trip meter...................................................113

Trunk

Opener ......................................................29

Trunk light .................................................. 31

Wattage................................................. 494

Turn signal lights


Switch..........................................................110

Wattage................................................. 494

V Vanity lights

Vanity lights............................................ 313

Wattage................................................. 494

Vanity mirrors

............................................. 313

VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics 

Integrated Management)................165

Vehicle identification number......... 487

Vehicle load limits..................................175

Ventilators.................................................321

VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio 

Steering) .................................................164

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) ......164

W Warning buzzers

Brake system.......................................438

Downshifting..........................................108

Open door .......................................... 440

Seat belt reminder ............................ 440

Warning lights

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ... 439

Brake system.......................................438

Charging system...............................438

Alphabetical index

ECB/VSC (Electronically 

Controlled Brake System/ 

Vehicle Stability Control).......... 439

Electric power steering 

warning light..................................... 439

Low fuel level.......................................440

Malfunction indicator lamp .......... 439

Master warning light..........................441

Open door ...........................................440

Pre-collision system......................... 439

Seat belt reminder light..................440

SRS airbags.......................................... 439

Tire pressure warning light...........440

Warning messages

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..448

Brake Assist (BA) .............................448

Dynamic radar 

cruise control................................... 446

Engine oil level......................................451

Engine oil maintenance....................451

Engine oil pressure........................... 444

Headlight............................................... 445

Hill-start assist control.....................448

Hood ....................................................... 449

Hybrid system.........................444, 453

Intuitive parking 

assist .............................446, 452, 456

Moon roof.............................................450

Open door ........................................... 449

Parking brake......................................450

Pre-Collision System ..........446, 452

Refueling................................................456

Rear lights system ............................. 445

Smart access system with 

push-button start............................ 457

Steering lock............................445, 459

Tire pressure warning 

system ..................................... 445, 452

TRAC (Traction control 

system)................................................ 448

Trunk ....................................................... 450

VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio 

Steering) ............................................ 448

VSC/ECB (Vehicle Stability 

Control/Electronically Controlled 

Brake system) ................................. 448

Washer fluid ........................................ 450

Washer

Checking ...............................................382


before winter ......................................176

Switch.........................................................126

Washing and waxing...........................352

Weight

Cargo capacity.....................................172

Load limits ...............................................175

Weight.................................................... 486

Wheels ......................................................397

Window glasses ......................................50

Window lock switch ...............................50

Windows

Power windows.................................... 50

Rear window defogger.................... 199

Washer .....................................................126

Windshield wipers

Position..................................................... 178

Windshield wipers ..............................126

Winter driving tips..................................176

Wireless remote control

Locking/Unlocking ............................. 22

Replacing the battery........................401

WMA disc ...............................................224

525

What to do if...

What to do if...

A tire punctures

P. 460/

461

If you have a flat tire

The hybrid system does not start

P. 59

P. 471

P. 476

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system

If the hybrid system will not start

If the 12 volt battery is discharged

The shift lever cannot be moved out



P. 472

If the shift lever cannot be shifted  from “P”

The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone

P. 480

If your vehicle overheats

Steam can be seen coming  from under the hood

The key is lost

P. 473

If you lose your keys

The battery runs out

P. 476

If the 12 volt battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked

P. 25

Doors

The horn begins to sound

P. 61

Alarm

The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand

P. 483

If the vehicle becomes stuck

526

What to do if...

The warning light or indicator light comes on

P. 438

If the warning light turns on

■ Warning lights

Brake system warning light or

P. 438

ABS warning light or

P. 439

ECB*/VSC warning light

P. 439

Low fuel level warning light

P. 440

SRS warning light

P. 439

Open door warning light

P. 440

Charging system warning light

P. 438

The warning message is displayed

Malfunction indicator lamp v or

P. 439

Driver’s seat belt reminder  light

P. 440


P. 440

Tire pressure warning light

P. 440

Electric power steering warning light

P. 439

Pre-collision system warning light

P. 439


P. 441

*: Electronically Controlled Brake 

System

P. 444

If the warning message is displayed

527

528

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 366

Trunk opener

P. 29

Fuel filler door

P. 55

Hood lock release lever

P. 366

Fuel tank capacity

Fuel type

Cold tire inflation  pressure

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill)

Engine oil type

Fuel filler door opener

P. 55

17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 lmp.gal.)

Premium unleaded gasoline only

With filter

Without filter qt. (L, Imp.qt.)

6.6 (6.3, 5.5)

6.2 (5.9

, 5.2

Tire inflation pressure

P. 493

)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30

P. 56, 488

P. 493

P. 489